Home

H8 Family E10T Emulator User`s Manual

Contents

1. Figure 7 1 Version Control 115 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 71 Selecting a Version Control System Initially the version control sub menu will appear as shown in figure 7 2 At this time only the Version Control gt Select option is available because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace op Tools RE 7 Launch Ertenial Depuager 15 bm 5 Ce Figure 7 2 Version Control Sub Menu 116 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To select a version control system 1 Select Version Control gt Select The dialog shown in figure 7 3 will be displayed This dialog lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control systems list and click the Select button The Current version control system is changed to reflect the new selection 3 Click the OK button to confirm the selection Select Version Control System 21 xi Version control systems Current version control system None Figure 7 3 Select Version Control System Dialog Note Only those version control systems which have been installed with the HEW will appear in the Select Version Control System dialog figure 7 3 Once a version control tool is sel
2. Figure 4 30 Add new session Dialog Box 224 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 30 Check the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session nA A UU N Enter the name of an existing session file that you would like to import into the existing project or click the Browse button to select the file location If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is not checked the imported new session file is generated in the project directory If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is checked a new session file is not generated in the project directory but is linked to the existing session file If the Make session file link read only check box is checked the linked session file is used as read only 6 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To remove a session n Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 2 Select the session you would like to remove 3 Click the Remove button Note that the current session cannot be removed 4 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To view the
3. High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Build Build All Current Congifuration Current Session Launch Slave Hew View Workspace Build File Stop Launch Debugger View Output IEEJ J Aaea m Figure 1 8 Standard Toolbar Template Selection Define Template hsert Template Jafer T Figure 1 9 Templates Toolbar Add File s Check Out File s Remove File s IiE Check h File s V ea File s Ie Status Bls Figure 1 10 Version Control Toolbar Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference a Figure 1 11 Difference Toolbar When the Standard toolbar or a toolbar is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 12 i If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its control bar to the new location Figure 1 12 i shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and figure 1 12 ii shows the Standard toolbar when it is floating i Is 4 Debus Debu JA O a fl i PN Hi Debus Debug A gk pia ai Figure 1 12 Standard Toolbar Docked and Floating gt To dock the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar or RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Drag the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar to
4. eeesesereessrereneessrerereneeeeusrerersruerererensruererurereresrere 137 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe eee ee ceeeesecssecssecsecesecaecaeecaeeeseseeeeeneeees 138 Visual SourceSafe command 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsaecsaecsaecseesaecsaesseesaeeeeeeneeees 139 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control eeeecescesecseeseeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeneeees 139 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control 0 oes 139 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control ee 139 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control eee 140 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation eee ese cseeceecsecssecaeesaecseecaeecaeeaeseeeaeeeaes 140 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File eee ceceeecesecesecesecsaecseecseeeaeseaeeeeeeeeeeeenes 140 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File eee cece ceeceseceecesecseeceecaeeeseseaeseeeeeeeeaeeegs 140 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options eee ee cee cess ceseceseceaecseecaeecaeesaerseeraeesaeeeeeeees 142 10 NetWork Facilitl Ss iscissi iseis ree ea EE SEEE 143 TOT OVEN EW a EE EEEE E ERE REEE AREE 143 10 1 1 Enabling network access essesseeesseseseeesesreesssrrrtssrsreeresrerrnsrsrrsrerteeresrenensenersee 144 10 1 2 Setting the administrator user s password e ssseessseereeseeresssrerrsrerrnsrrrrsreererreees 144 10 1 3 Adding new users to the System eee
5. Figure 5 14 Format Dialog Box 246 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enter the range you wish to display as an address value or an equivalent symbol in the Begin and End fields Select the data size and format for the display from the Display Value As and Format drop down lists respectively Select the number of bytes displayed in one line from the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display start and end addresses Memory Address Value 0x00001000 28150 28149 0x00001010 30977 7440 0x00001020 64902 65532 0x00001030 28512 16384 0x00001040 3446 21766 0x00001050 31031 6400 0x00001060 28640 16454 0x00001070 65492 28512 0x00001080 6064 28640 0x00001090 3425 65496 0x00001040 27024 65490 0x00001080 31008 19888 0x000010C0 24064 3432 0x000010D0 8618 65488 0x000010 E0 28512 256 0x000010F0 28512 256 Figure 5 15 Memory Window Note Each item in the n columns is called as the memory unit There are three display columns Address First address of the memory data displayed on this row n Memory data read from Address and n means the offset value from the first address of the row Data is read from the debugging platform s physical memory in the access width and then converted to the display width Value
6. ccc ecceseceseceee cess ceeeaeeeeeseeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenseens 194 Section 4 Preparations for Debugging eee cee ceneeeeneeeeeeceeaeeeeaeeeaaees 199 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files c eesceecessseceeececsseceeneecaeceeeeecaeeseneeceaeceeaeecnaeeeeneecsas 199 4 2 Method for Activating HEW accisce c tesistisdesscestecsbsivessssalentsaisecassesseesssteaoyesensnescdsaseessestesaeds 200 4 2 1 Creating the New Workspace Toolchain Not Used ec eeeeeceeseeeeeseeeseeeees 201 4 2 2 Creating the New Workspace Toolchain Used eee eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneees 205 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace cece ceeeee cece creeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenaeees 210 4 3 Setting at Emulator Act vation ii sic cuscesciisevsscscneveescnsssvstesscasenssonevensctsscesseesscnencesenents 212 4 3 1 Setting at Emulator Activation eee cceeeeseecreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeseeeeeeeeaeeees 212 4 3 2 Downloading a Program eee ee eecesecesecseceseceeessecneeceecaeesaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeatees 214 4 3 3 Setting the Writing Flash Memory Mode e eee eceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 215 4 4 Debug Sessions isecen thessaaieets bsiedacevansdendvensectacs debts eeraa iei 222 4 4 1 Selecting a Session oo ee eee ceseeesecssecseeceeseeceecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeees 222 4 4 2 Adding and Removing Sessions eceeeceeecseeeseeeeecaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeseeeeereees 224 4 4 3 Saving Session Information 00 0 0
7. 2 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 11 2 3 Ensure the compare with version control radio button is enabled 149 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Enter the first file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 5 Clicking the advanced button displays the dialog in 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 6 Click compare 7 The difference view is displayed as shown in figure 11 1 Compare files E xj Reference file K SHEW20 HEW 3 0 EXE Win Release 7 Browse Compare with file on drive Compare Cancel Advanced iil Target file bA Browse Figure 11 2 Difference compare files dialog Compare Files Advanced Options xj m Advanced Cancel Figure 11 3 Difference advanced options dialog The difference view functionality can be accessed in two different ways The difference view has its own toolbar this is shown in figure 11 4 This functionality can also be accessed via the difference window right mouse button pop up This is shown in figure 11 5 Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference
8. High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix D Placeholders This appendix describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the High performance Embedded Workshop components D 1 What is a Placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which is replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can take the file to edit as a parameter When invoking the editor the following shortcut could be made e g c myedit myeditor exe c files file1 c if you wanted to open FILE1 C from the directory c files However what happens if you want the HEW to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files file1 c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open the file that I have chosen at that time To do this you can replace the specific name of the file for a general placeholder i e c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace FULLFILE with the file you have selected D 2 Inserting a Placeholder Placeholders can only be entered into three specific edit fields within the HEW figures D 1 D 2 and D 3 There are four ways a placeholder can be en
9. The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase New Build Phase Step 1 of 4 fo meddan a system phases Figure 3 3a New Build Phase Dialog Step 1 42 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The second step figure 3 3b asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build New Build Phase Step 2 of 4 W What type of phase would you like to create Multiple phase The command is applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group C source file C Single phase The command is only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool is a linker lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 3b New Build Phase Dialog Step 2 The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project Itis possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multipl
10. Using the Editor of the volume on the HEW I want to change the settings of a tool but the Tools gt Administration menu option is not selectable Tools gt Administration is not selectable while a workspace is open To open the Tool Administration dialog box close the current workspace I did not edit any of the project files But some of files were built again when I selected Build gt Build A file is built again if any of the following conditions holds 1 The options for the current file have been modified since the last build 2 If any of the output files are missing 3 Any of the source files have a newer date than the phase s output files 4 Any of the dependent files have a newer date than the phase s output files 5 In a user defined custom build phase the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box is checked To see the status of this check box select Options gt Build Phases select the phase in the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab and click the Modify button Then you will see the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box on the Command tab 6 A subcommand file is selected in Optimizing Linkage Editor I want to exclude a file in a project from build temporarily Push the right button of your mouse on the file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Ex
11. cece ceeeese cee ceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeees 227 4 5 Connecting the Emulator ccc eeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeensecesecaecaecsaecsaecaeeeaeseaeseneeeeeeteeas 228 4 6 Reconnecting the Emulator cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaecsaecsaecaecaecsaeceeseeeneeeneeegs 230 4 7 Ending the Emulators iets Ae asses SUR ie BS 230 OCMC DSU PIE 25 acs ccnzratdvencteaeseenessaancanss teakunesasactanspmeenencscasncexspniaxeeesatuets 231 5 1 Setting the Environment for Emulation 00 0 eee eee eeceseceseeeeceseceaeceeeeseeeaessaeeaeenaeenaees 231 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box eee eee esee cece cneeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeees 231 5 1 2 General Pates ensien onite eee EEE a eE 231 5 2 Downloading a Programi ss sisiecociorerrisereirserissirieidisei d rieieetoideseisei ioios dndi de in ieira 234 5 2 1 Downloading a Programm ee eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeceeeeseceseceaecaecsaeseecaeeeaeeeneeees 234 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Code ccescsscsssssovicessennscssnesenesouenoevsevsseeseneesebeseecsenseete 235 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code eeeseeeseeecseeesecseeeeesseceeeaeenaes 238 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code o00 eee cece ceeecseeseecseeeneteneeeeeeaeeeaes 239 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address ee eee cceeseeescesscesecesecssecsecesecaecaecseecseeeaeeeneeees 239 5 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 240 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface 00 eee ee ce
12. list and then click the Modify button beside it Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list and then click the Remove button beside it 130 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 3 Specifying Comments If a command contains the placeholder COMMENT then the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the dialog as shown in figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment 21x File c hew demo demo sbrk c Cancel Comment T Apply comment to all files Figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment Dialog You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files check box before clicking OK 131 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password Most version control tools will require you to pass a user name and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users The custom version control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAMEB and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed
13. p_sam gt s0 a 0 p_sam gt sl a 1 p_sam gt s2 a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt s5 a 5 p_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 Figure 6 10 Source Window Break State 318 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The user can see the cause of the break that occurred last time in the Status window e Select Status from the CPU submenu of the View menu After the Status window is displayed open the Platform sheet and check the Status of Cause of last break w Status H8 xxxx ELOT SYSTEM HS xxxx Ready Cause of last break RUNNING Run tine count O000h000min000s210ms Emulation mode Normal Big Figure 6 11 Status Window Note The items that can be set in this window differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help 319 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 10 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Eventpoint window e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Eventpoint window is displayed Select the Breakpoint sheet w Eventpoint Action Breakpoint Enable Address H 000010B6 Tutorial cpp 44 Breakcondition Figure 6 12 Eventpoint Window The popup menu opened by clicking the Eventpoint window with the right hand mouse button allows the user to set or change breakpoi
14. 1 Select Tools gt Options The Tools Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Show files in notebook check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 2 1 The Editor Toolbars The editor has four related toolbars Editor Search Bookmarks and Templates They provide a shortcut to the functions of the editor which you will use most often The following sections describe each buttons function 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons O New File The new file button creates a new source file window with a default name When you save the file you can specify your own filename ca Open File Click this button if you want to open a file It invokes a standard file chooser select the file which you want to open and then click Open Save File Saves the active source file Save All Files Saves all of the files in the editor 64 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual amp Print File To print the contents of the current window click this button A Cut Clicking this button will remove the current text selection and place a copy of it onto the Windows clipboard it can be pasted back to a file with a paste operation Copy This button allows you to copy the current text selection into the Windows clipboard Paste The paste button copies the contents of the clipboard into the active window at the position o
15. 1 When an odd address is set the address is rounded down to an even address 2 A software break is accomplished by replacing instructions Accordingly it can be set only to the flash memory or RAM area However a software break cannot be set to the following addresses An area other than the flash memory or RAM An area occupied by the E10T emulator program An instruction in which Break Condition 1 is satisfied 3 During step execution a software breakpoint is disabled 4 A condition set at Break Condition 1 is disabled immediately after starting execution when an instruction at a software breakpoint is executed A break does not occur even if a condition of Break Condition is satisfied immediately after starting the execution 271 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 When execution resumes from the breakpoint address after the program execution stops at the software breakpoint single step execution is performed at the address before execution resumes Therefore realtime operation cannot be performed 6 Settings of software breakpoint and Break Condition 1 are invalid while the STEP OVER function is being used 272 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 11 Elf Dwarf2 Support The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language Key Features e Source level debugging e C C operators e
16. File menu Overwrite of a File In command line interface a file that has the same name as the output file is overwritten without asking the user Usage with Other Products To install the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler package or H8 H8 300 series C C compiler package after installing the emulator software for HEW select High performance Embedded Workshop as the component to be installed in Select Components during installation of the compiler package Download of Load Modules When load modules are downloaded select Debug gt Download gt All DownLoad Modules 372 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 24 Writing Flash Memory Mode When microcomputers are continuously programmed be sure to turn the target on or off 25 Memory Access in the Writing Flash Memory Mode Memory cannot be accessed in the Writing Flash Memory mode In this mode values displayed in the Memory or IO window are dummy 26 Memory Access during Flash Memory Programming During flash memory programming e g user program execution operation for memory accessing such as opening the Memory window is not allowed Values displayed here are dummy Access the memory again after flash memory programming has been completed 7tENESAS 373 374 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System User s Manual H8 Family E10T Emulat
17. The access address instruction fetch address data or bus cycle condition can be set This function can be also set from the EVENT column in the source window For the setting refer to section 5 2 Downloading a Program 2 PC break function BREAKPOINT Breaks when the dedicated instruction at the specified address that has been replaced is executed This function can be set on the Breakpoint page in the Eventpoint dialog box It can also be set when the Editor column for the line to be set is double clicked in the Editor or Disassembly window 3 Forced break function Forcibly breaks the user program 175 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 4 Memory Access Functions The emulator has the following memory access functions 1 Memory read write function Memory window The memory contents are displayed in the window Only the amount specified when the Memory window is opened can be read If the memory is written in the Memory window a read in the range displayed in the Memory window will occur for updating the window When the Memory window is not to be updated change the setting in Lock Refresh from the popup menu me command A command line function that reads or writes the specified amount of memory at the specified address 2 User program downloading function A load module registered in the workspace can be downloaded Such module can be selected from Download
18. To open the Register window choose View gt CPU gt Registers or click the Register toolbar button The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general purpose registers and the values displayed in hexadecimal fe resister ox H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H OOOOFF80 H OOFFFF Figure 5 11 Register Window 244 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 4 2 Expanding a Bit Register If a register is used as a set of flags at the bit level for the control of state its one character symbol rather than its state indicate each bit Double click on the register s name to display the Register CCR dialog box and switch each bit on or off Checking the box for any bit specifies it as holding a 1 while removing the check specifies it as a 0 Register CCR Imask User Imask Half carry Figure 5 12 Expanding a Bit Register 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents To change a register s content open the Register dialog box in one of the following methods e Double click the register you want to change e Select the register you want to change and choose Edit from the popup menu Register ERO Whole Register 7 Figure 5 13 Register Dialog Box You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose whether to modify the whole register contents a masked
19. dialog the Windows operating system is installed in c Windows and the Windows system directory is c Windows System a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable and c project is mapped to x ve project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent files location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you might be informed D 4 Placeholder Tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system If there is a placeholder pop up menu next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from
20. k 0 k lt gap kt for i ktgap i lt 10 izitgap for j i gap j gt k j j gap iffalj gt alitgap t aljl ali a j tgap alitgap t else break Figure 6 21 Source Window Step In The cursor position moves to the first statement of the sort function in the Source window 7tENESAS 327 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 13 2 Executing Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next statement of the calling statement in the main function e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Debug menu or click the Step Out button on the toolbar Note It takes time to execute this function When the calling source is clarified use Go To Cursor P Figure 6 22 Step Out Button Tutorial High performance Embeddec shop tutorialepp Edit View Project Options Build Debue Memory Tools Window Help jCsda S seelOTo m lpl elaslens 2 e eae lm lal a fy Hy A ll g EES Debug H8_yoom_E10T_ SessionH8 _ 00x_ 10T_S E mi e mmx sats lFUGMNPeS maesan fess zixl long a 10 long j 5 Tutori fat I Assembly source fi class Sample p_sam C header file ebakch 0x00001054 p_sam ew Sample 0x000010Se for i i lt 103 i Df sorth 0x00001066 j rand 3 stackscth 0x00001072 if lt Ot source file 0x0000107a Se as eee dx00001088 alil i sbrke source file 0x000010b
21. 73 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed gt 4 7 gt To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL F2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 A green mark appears in the blank on the left side of the line to indicate the presence of an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL F2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 The mark will be removed and the line will return to normal text To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark press F2 or select Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark from the local menu or click the next bookmark toolbar button ma To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark press SHIFT F2 or select Bookmarks
22. AAT Figure 11 4 Difference toolbar 150 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Pi Compare Export results to file Ignore whitespace gA Find fa Find previous ry Find next T Previous difference Next difference Refresh comparison Figure 11 5 Difference popup menu The functionality for each menu item is described below e Compare This opens a new compare window so that some new files can be comapred and the differences displayed e Export results to file This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format e Ignore white space The ignore white space option which is on the advanced options dialog can be toggled via this menu item e Find Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the HEW editor e Find next Finds the next string that meets the find requirements e Find previous Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements e Previous Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference e Next Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next difference e Refresh comparison Refreshs the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison The difference window also allows the colours in the view to be customised This procedure is outli
23. Class navigation category has been switched off the Smart edit capability of HEW will not be active During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible Ifyou are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure 14 2 161 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual If you are trying to use a C function then the dialog in Figure 14 3 is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This dialog allows you to see what functions are available for the current object Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you 162 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite cJaws cJaws m_n 3 m_nDangerous Bm_nFins 3 m_nJaws m_nlegs m_nliveinwater Bm_nlives amp m_nSea Figure 14 2 Smart edit member selection include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite myfish myfish FeedTheShark int Feed
24. IO Ctrl I EA Opens the IO window Status Ctrl U R Opens the Status window Sym Labels Shift Opens the Labels window bol Ctrl A Watch Ctrl W a Opens the Watch window Locals Shift a Opens the Locals window Ctrl W Code Eventpoints Ctrl E E Opens the Event window Trace Ctrl T Opens the Trace window Stack Trace Ctrl K m Opens the Stack Trace window 7tENESAS 363 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table G 1 Window Functions cont Menu Option View Gra cont phic Image Toolbar Shortcut Button Shift Ctrl G mm Remarks Opens the Image window Waveform Shift Ctrl V Opens the Waveform window Options Debug Sessions Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Radix Hexadecimal Uses a hexadecimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Decimal Uses a decimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Octal Uses an octal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Binary Uses a binary for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered
25. In navigation components are supported as standard HEW 3 0 the following C Classes All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed Each category is displayed in the top level of the view Underneath each category each project in the workspace is displayed Then the items belonging to that particular project are displayed below the project icon RENESAS 155 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information gt To switch off a navigation category 1 Right click on the navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure 13 2 is shown 2 Select the Select Categories menu item 3 The dialog in figure 13 3 is displayed 4 Uncheck any categories you are not interested in seeing definitions for 5 Click OK Go to Declaration Go to Definition Configure View Select Categories lv Allow Docking Hide Figure 13 2 C Navigation pop up menu Select Categories Ea Please select the categories to scan for C Defines i C Functions Cancel C Classes SK Figure 13 3 C Navigation select categories dialog Note The navigation items are displayed gradually as the
26. Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine a tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable amp Pp sam new Sample o gt fori 1 0 1 lt 10 i jf j rand H 0003 1ft lt lt DE Ds Sate ali Figure 5 40 Tooltip Watch 5 12 2 Instant Watch Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the popup menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch m a Oxffd4e one fO Figure 5 41 Instant Watch Dialog Box 278 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 5 12 3 Watch Window You can view any value in the Watch window Opening a Watch Window To open a Watch window choose View gt Symbol gt Watch or click on the Watch toolbar button ZA if itis visible A Watch window opens Initially the contents of the w
27. Tab size field the number of desired tabs 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect Options xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network r Spacing T Use spaces as tabs Tabsze 4 V Enable auto indentation r General IV Save files before executing any tools M Show files in notebook J Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring IV Enable Smart edit for C files r External editor I Use extemal editor Figure 4 7 Options Dialog Editor Tab When a TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character is usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog gt To use spaces as tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Use spaces as tabs check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect 76 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 3 Auto Indentation When you press return in a standard editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of a window Auto Indentation is a feature which when return is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non white space character of
28. Workspace Window Docked and Floating When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 16 If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close button zx Figure 1 16 Control Bar of Docking Window To dock the Workspace window or the Output window RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to dock the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to dock the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a floating window or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating window changes gt To float the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to float the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to float the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a docking window or 2 Drag the control
29. environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the Environment tab To remove an environment variable select it and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable 20x D Cancel Value ee c dos c mptools c windows c temp Placeholder popup menu Figure 5 7 Environment Variable Dialog 94 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 6 Uninstalling Components The HEW provides a built in uninstaller method which can remove unregistered components gt To uninstall a component 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click on the uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog is invoked figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool gizi i Close Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools Browse ebug IV Include subfolders Start Located Tools which can be uninstalled Component Version Installation Directory Uninstall i Hip Search Status Idle Figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool 3 Enter the directory in which you would like
30. field and click the OK button or press the Enter key This will close the dialog box and copy the memory block to the new address 252 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area Use the memory save function to save the memory in a specified address space to a disk file Open the Save Memory As dialog box by choosing File gt Save memory Save Memory As Cancel File name Co Start address End Address ee o o ooo Access size fi x Figure 5 20 Save Memory As Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the memory block that you wish to save and a name and format for the file The File name combo box contains the previous four file names used for saving memory Clicking the button can open the standard File Save As dialog box On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the memory block will be saved into the disk as a file of the specified format type When the file has been saved a message box for confirmation is displayed The access size for saving data can be selected from the Access size combo box 253 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Memory in the specified address space can be verified using the memory verify function Open the Verify Memory dialog box by choosing File gt Verify Memory The access size at verification can be selected
31. overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function 248 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Contents The memory contents can be modified via the Edit Memory dialog box Move the cursor on the memory unit depending on the Memory window display choice that you wish to change Either double click on the memory unit or press the Enter key The dialog box shown in figure 5 16 is displayed Edit Memory Current Yalue HFF New Value m Figure 5 16 Edit Memory Dialog Box A number or C C expression can be entered in the New Value field After you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key Then the dialog box closes and the new value is written into memory The memory contents can also be modified by moving the cursor on the memory unit and entering the new value in hexadecimal through the keyboard 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range If the range to be selected is in the Memory window you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit depending on the Memory window display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted 249 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory To find a value in memory open the Memory window and select Search from the po
32. rand 25 Tutorial 0x00001072 if lt Of J Assembly source file 0x0000107a ps E C header fil ir a header Tie 0x00001088 ali J E 0x000010b6 p_sam gt sort a 4 stackscth 0x000010c4 p_sam gt change la source file H dbscte 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s0 a 0 D sbrk 0x000010e0 p_sam gt s1 a 1 sbrke 0x000010 0 p_sam gt s2 a 2 G source file Ox00001100 p_sam gt s3 a 3 B resetpre cpp 0200001110 p_sam gt s4 4 4 A sortepp 0x00001120 p_sam gt s5 a 5 A tutoriale 0x00001130 p_sam gt s6 a 6 cpp 0x00001140 p_sam gt s7 a 7 Download modules 0x00001150 p_sam gt s8 a 8 RG Tutorialabs 0x00001160 p_sam gt s9 a 9 Dependencies 0x00001170 delete p_sam E sbrkh 0x0000117a E sorth ox00001182 yold abort void B stackscth 0x00001186 Ej Projects 4 Templates Navigation tutorialcpp Figure 6 5 Source Window Displaying the Source Program e Select the Display option from the Tool menu to set a font and size that are legible if necessary Initially the Source window shows the start of the user program but the user can use the scroll bar to scroll through the user program and look at the other statements 315 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 7 Setting a PC Breakpoint A PC breakpoint is a simple debugging function The Source window provides a very simple way of setting a PC breakpoint at any point in
33. s Manual Table 2 1 Emulator Functions cont No Item 5 Memory access function Function Downloading to RAM Downloading to flash memory Single line assembly Reverse assembly disassembly Reading of memory Writing to memory Automatic updating of a display of selected variables during user program execution Fill Search Move Copy 6 General control register access function Reads or writes the general control register 7 Internal I O register access function Reads or writes the internal I O register 8 Source level debugging Various source level debugging functions function 9 Command line function Supports command input Batch processing is enabled when a file is created by arranging commands in input order 10 Help function Describes the usage of each function or command syntax input from the command line window The specific functions of the emulator are described in the next section Note The number of hardware break conditions differs depending on the product 174 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 Trace Functions The branch source addresses mnemonics operands and source lines are displayed Since this function uses the trace buffer built into the device a realtime trace can be acquired 2 3 Break Functions The emulator has the following three break functions 1 Hardware break function Uses a break controller incorporated in the device
34. uspeje O lowsre h resetprg c B stackscth E sbrk c 2 sbrk h vecttbl c E vecth Lislis lis lis mints i o Figure 2 20 Dependencies under Each File 31 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown figure 2 21 i For example in C code if you write an include statement such as include lt stdio h gt then stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes option figure 2 21 ii a aQ G Demo Demo E Assembly source file 3 Assembly source file A cO ste cO stc 3 6 C source file 3 6 C source file E hwcfg c E hwcfg c 2 intv c 2 intv c 2 main c 2 main c 4 sbrk c 8 sbrk c Dependencies 3 Dependencies E stddef h stdio h PProjects Navigation BPProjects S Navigation Figure 2 21 Standard Library Includes 32 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 8 3 Show File Paths If Show file paths is selected all of the files in the project window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter figure 2 22 Workspace oj x Demo E E Assembly source file 2 C
35. 27x Variable a Value c dos c mptools c windows c temp Placeholder popup menu Figure 3 4 Environment Variable Dialog If the tool you are adding can display its output as the tool is running then use the Read Output On Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output which is being displayed by the tool and display it in the output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output On Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then uncheck the Read Output On Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase is added to the bottom of the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog Figure 3 2 45 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 Ordering Build Phases In a standard build shown in figure 3 5 you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler before the assembler before the linker or after the linker You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the
36. 286 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 4 Setting PC Breakpoints It is possible to display modify and add PC breakpoints on the Breakpoint sheet Eventpoint Action Breakpoint Enable Address H OO0010E0 Tutorial cpp 4 Breakcondition Figure 5 47 Eventpoint Window Breakpoint Sheet This window displays and sets the breakpoints Items that can be displayed in the sheet are listed below Type Breakpoint State Whether the breakpoint is enabled or disabled Condition An address that the breakpoint is set Address Program counter Corresponding file name line and symbol name Action Operation of the emulator when a break condition is satisfied Break Halts execution When a breakpoint is double clicked in this window the Set Break dialog box is opened and break conditions can be modified A popup menu containing the following options is available by right clicking within the window 5 13 5 Add Sets breakpoints Clicking this item will open the Set Break dialog box and break conditions can be specified 287 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 6 Edit Only enabled when one breakpoint is selected Select a breakpoint to be edited and click this item The Set Break dialog box will open and break conditions can be changed 5 13 7 Enable Enables the selected breakpoint s 5 13 8 Disable Disables the selected breakpoint
37. 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 3 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Searching and Navigating through Files essseeeesseesessressssrsrssrrrrseerssrerrssrerssrrrrsrrersseeees 71 ADA Finding Texts csiis cscecsssecvnsctunceaseiienesccuacy ccstghvessetevses a EEEE EE 71 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files 00 0 eee eseceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeereseeeseesenes 72 4 5 3 Replacing TeX scrierii ieoten ee ar a E E e aE NEEE A E ETE 72 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line oo eee eee cee cee ceee cee ceeseecaeecaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeeseneneeens 73 Bookmarks nerie eke sitet pects E ste es eee 73 Print Biles esses ceessscesseaacespecetstescteavvesaney setae eE e E Ear rA Ereann 74 Configuring Text Layout csecsecseeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeecesecssecsaecsecsaecsaeeaecsaesseeeeseneeegs 75 48 1 Page Set seicssinsvsdevsciscen steven set ccuebbancavacdiccougesaststeeddnsvensdevalitesddusnenetevneevdeausreeeets 75 48 2 Changing Tabs eiennenn E A T eee 76 4 8 3 Auto Indentation sientie ee n A E EAEE EE 77 Splitting a WindOW eee cse ese cnsecseecaeecseeeeseseeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeaesseeeeeeseenaeenaees 78 Configuring Text siescssecetectscibecis sees ecoenveenanspietscles is eel shes ceases ected EERE EE aes 79 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font esssseeseeseesesesseessseeerssrreeerreerssrereserrserresresreresreetee 79 Syntax Coloring cscs sceess ces evacesstaesteytacs a
38. 4 Connecting the Emulator to the User System 1 The connector must be installed to the user system Table 3 1 shows the recommended connector for the emulator Table 3 1 Recommended Connector Type Number Manufacturer Specifications 2514 6002 3M Limited 14 pin straight type Note When designing the connector layout on the user board do not place any components within 3 mm of the connector 2 The pin assignments of the connector are shown in section 1 in the additional document Notes on Connecting the H8 xxxx Notes 1 To connect the signals output from the connector refer to the MCU pin assignment 2 To remove the user system interface cable from the user system pull the tab on the connector upward 3 The range of frequencies that the emulator operates at is different depending on the MCU used 4 Connect the signals from the connector as shown in section in the additional document Notes on Connecting the H8 xxxx 184 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 5 System Check When the software is executed use the procedure below to check that the emulator is connected correctly Here use the workspace for a tutorial provided on the product Refer to section 4 Preparations for Debugging for the other activating method to create a new project or use a workspace for the HEW of the old version 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connect
39. 4 Launching the HEW To run the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the HEW By default the Welcome dialog box shown in figure 1 21 will be displayed Welcome 21 xi Options Ey g Cancel Open a recent project workspace Administration 4 demo demo hws i Browse to another project workspace Figure 1 21 Welcome Dialog To create a new workspace select Create a new project workspace and click OK To open one of recent project workspaces select Open a recent project workspace select a workspace from the drop down list and click OK The recent project workspace list displays the same information as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select Browse to another project workspace and click OK To register a tool to or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button see chapter 5 Tool Administration for details Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 1 5 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu To open the system menu click the icon at the upper left corner of
40. 6 10 will be displayed 3 Enter the description into the Information field 4 Check the Show workspace information on workspace open check box if you want a workspace properties dialog to be launched on opening a workspace This check box has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog 5 Click OK to save the description on the Information dialog Click the Cancel button not to save the description Workspace Properties Name Demo_H8S26004 Location C Hew Demo_H8526004 Demo_H8S 26004 hws Last modified 10 28 30 Monday June 23 2003 _ Cancel CPU family H8S H8 300 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Information No workspace information available IV Show workspace information on workspace open Figure 6 10 Workspace Properties Dialog When a workspace is opened the High performance Embedded Workshop can display this information so that it is possible to determine whether the workspace is the desired workspace To display this information on opening a workspace set the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control com
41. C C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user definition e Stack trace 5 11 1 C C Operators The following C C language operators are available T5 as amp l as i 1 gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt I amp amp II Buffer_start 0x1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 5 11 2 C C Expressions Expression Examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p_Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specities reference of a member with pointer C g_value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies cast operation C C 273 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 11 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels In some languages for example C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address When such a label name is entered in a dialog box the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions
42. Data displayed in an alternative format 247 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats If you want to change the display format of the Memory window select Format from the pop up menu The dialog box shown in figure 5 14 is displayed To display and edit memory in different widths use the Format drop down list For example choose the Byte option and the display will be updated to show the memory area as individual bytes The data can be converted into different formats as shown in the third column Value The list of formats depends on the data selection To change the number of bytes displayed on one line use the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list For example choose the 8 Byte option and the display will be updated to show the 8 byte data on one line 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the popup menu and move the split up bar 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area To change the memory area displayed in the Memory window use the scroll bars To quickly look at a new address use the Set Address dialog box This can be opened by choosing Start Address from the popup menu Enter the new address value and click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the Memory window display is updated with the data at the new address When an
43. Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the Output window Selecting the Open lt file gt option from the Workspace windows pop up menu Clicking the Launch Editor toolbar button To specify an external editor 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 6 11 Options 2 xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Tab size 4 m Spacing V Enable auto indentation General IV Save files before executing any tools M Show files in notebook Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring IV Enable Smart edit for C files External editor Use external editor Figure 6 11 Options Dialog Editor Tab 110 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Check the Use external editor check box The External Editor dialog will be displayed figure 6 12 External Editor 1 21 xi Command CAWINDOWS Notepad exe Browse OK Arguments to open file Cancel StFULLFILE gt Arguments to open file at line fsiFu LLFILE gt Figure 6 12 External Editor Dialog 3 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 4 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the fi
44. Figure 5 55 Image Window The memory content is displayed as an image 5 16 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 5 16 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 303 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 16 4 Displaying the Pixel Information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Color mode Index Color Pixel Index No 195 Position Image Size Width Height Buffer Size Width wl Height aj Figure 5 56 Pixel Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information on the pixel under the cursor in decimal notation Position Displays the cursor location as X and Y coordinates in decimal notation X X coordinate of the cursor Y Y coordinate of the cursor Buffer Size Displays the buffer size in decimal notation Width Width of the buffer Height Height of the buffer Image Size Displays the width and height of the display in decimal notation Width Width of the display Height Height of the di
45. File eee eeeecceesceseceseceseceseceecaeecaeesseseeecaeeeaeeeneeees 263 58 7 Saving Labels into a File cccccccccnsose sstcchs cectaevensones cousenescsdeedscdssseuct sobeeversetsevecders 263 5 8 8 Searching fora Label 2 c sscccsevsssseccescseesseseeesecescesneesacioesvoucsseosoesscvsntvesebssniess 264 5 8 9 Searching for the Next Label oo ee ee eeceseceseceaecsaecseecaeecaeeeaeseaeseeeeenenesees 264 5 8 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label eee ee cseeseeeeeeneeeneeeeeeees 264 Executing Your Pro stan s ss ceceiseciscvnscdh ccussessassaddaccughvesd teedes dguyeessdehad esdiisoveedsdlbewiressaevs 265 591 Running from Resetivcsc siccs ski ni ne Ga ac E EEEE oen 265 5 9 2 COMUMUING RUN essiens Eae E EE EEEE EES RE Ee T A 265 5 9 3 Running to the Cursor sn cscciscivecseencchsstussensecctsbenesvensschsetedcedsaesasesohssoabeenseesbecbenes 266 5 9 4 Running from a Specified Address eee ceesecssecseecaecsaecaeecsessaeseeeaeeeaes 267 ix RENESAS 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 39 9 SUBSE Stepen career ei e ease ae e eea RE RiR eraa a 268 5 9 6 M ltiple Steps lt issci c sascsscestensckdbis si goteus sabeedseguesesactaeksosevgevsese stevens ESEE ERS 269 Stopping Your Program scessessecssecsoecseecoeecoevenevenseensesssessenssesseesseeseesnaesonesenvensseses 270 510 1 Stopping EXSCU ON iczccsscschezsssissesestegsbsccsarecsssnlsnusatnavessesse
46. HEW The user can add and remove users from the projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files e Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the source files But it is not possible to change user access rights from this access level e Read write file access Only the source files can be modified All project settings can only be viewed not modified e Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above gt To add a new user to the system 1 2 2 4 5 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed Click the add button The log in dialog is displayed This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK Once OK is clicked the user is added with read only rights To change the
47. High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Notes on Setting the Break Condition 1 When Step In Step Over or Step Out is selected the settings of Break Condition are disabled 2 Setting of Break Condition 1 is disabled when an instruction to which a BREAKPOINT has been set is executed 3 When step over function is used the settings of BREAKPOINT and Break Condition 1 are disabled Items that can be displayed in the sheet are listed below Type Break channel number State Whether the breakpoint is enabled or disabled Condition A condition that satisfies a break Action Operation of the emulator when a break condition is satisfied Break Halts execution When a breakpoint is double clicked in this window the Break condition 1 dialog box is opened and break conditions can be modified For details on the Break condition 1 dialog box refer to the online help for each product A popup menu containing the following options is available by right clicking within the window 5 13 14 Edit Only enabled when one breakpoint is selected Select a breakpoint to be edited and click this item The Break condition 1 dialog box will open and break conditions can be changed 5 13 15 Enable Enables the selected break channel s A break channel that the condition has not been set is not enabled 5 13 16 Disable Disables the selected break channel s When a break channel is disabled a break will not occur
48. If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a comma e g c h Enter the directory in which you would like to search files into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphically if you click the Browse button If you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search sub directories check box If you just want to search the single directory specified in the Directory field then ensure that this check box is not checked If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match case check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window To jump to an instance of the string double click on the desired entry in the Output window Replacing Text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text gt To replace text in a file 1 2 3 72 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is
49. Please type a description of the problem you wish to report Print x How would you like to submit the report Figure 12 1 Submit bug report dialog 153 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 154 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 13 Navigation facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop 3 0 has a number of new integrated navigation facilities The navigation window is located alongside the project and templates window This view is shown below in Figure 13 1 LF SAn INT_OFFSET I MAMMAL amp ANIMAL C Classes 5 0 amp CShark amp CShark GetClassN ame void lt m_nFins E m_nSharpTeeth CCrocodile CCrocodile CCrocodile GetClassN ame void s m_nLiveinWater E m_nSharpTeeth CFish amp CFish amp CFish amp GetClassName void E m_nLivein Water CGreatWhite S CGreatwhite amp CGreatWhite FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood FeedTheShark char pszO0therT ype FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonFood Project Templates o Navigation Navigation entries Navigation category Project Class name Class members Figure 13 1 Navigation view The navigation view contains categories for all supported navigation types
50. Process Revisited ei eceesseeseeseeesceescesecesecesecsaecsecaecsaecsaesaeecaeeeaeseaeeneeeaes 3 1 Whatisa Bld isccceecoscessdiseveecevsedeseclosteeechesscuan Aen E A A Creating a Custom Build Phase ssseeeseseeeseeseeeeessieesserrrsstsrenresreereserresrentesrerresesrreresreet Ordering Build Phases ic5 sss sscassctazetedeadesisesdezshscts enrete Ea E aee T aTe eeri EEn EAS ESS 33 1 Build Phase Order eieiei iseer renerion iao iene RE RENEE 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order cisccssiciccsesessetsccctecsca cshvosaed cise vencsnsovesdesendeussbunccvaedeecevsnvenss Setting Custom Build Phase Options cee eeceeceseeereeeeceseeeeceseceseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeaeeeeens SAD Options Vabisessccesscedscescesicessecetesssaetsessces ede sesscosectepscescueasestsesssvecesvesaevsevesasnsnsst s SAD Output Piles Tab csi scccscesccssicsceveaccusees tckeedes sshvosaes ance veadivvovecdsbaddanschgsachactvecansensten 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tabene rE SUR acini File Mappings isssicsezcetvavessecseveistacaseesceacswaeeduer de A tay ebebaceeds E EAE TESA Controlling the Build eee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseesecesecaecsaecsecaecsaecsaesaesaeeeaeeeneeags Logging Build Output sick ccscecesscensssigeseasctdecagevtessleovadceresscvsntesdeobeconsovessatavdesdnenicedeesbseuss Changing Toolchain Version ce ce esecseesseeeeeeseeeseesecesecsaecsaecsaecaecsaecaecaaesaeeeaeseneeegs Using an External Debug eet zi csscsietiseisissssesststenavenvseseeiscsesse
51. Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click Cancel to stop the find action The High performance Embedded Workshop editor also allows you to search for a string across many files Ti RENESAS 4 5 2 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Finding Text in Multiple Files gt To search for text in many files 1 Select Edit gt Find in Files select Find in Files from the editor window s local menu or click the find in files toolbar button Gi The Find in Files dialog box will be displayed figure 4 3 Find In Files 2 xi Find M yStruct Cancel In files types 1 c cpp exp fsy h hpp inc lis p emca Directory Je hew demo demo X Browse I Match case IV Search sub directories I Regular expressions 4 5 3 Figure 4 3 Find in Files Dialog Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field
52. Step Auto Mode Steps only one source line when the Source window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Assembly Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Source Steps only one source line Halt Program Esc Stops the execution of the user program Connect la e Connects the debugging platform Initialize 7tENESAS Disconnects the debugging platform and connects it again 365 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table G 1 Window Functions cont Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Debug Disconnect a cont Remarks Disconnects the debugging platform This option cannot be used in some products Download Modules Downloads the object program Unload Modules Unloads the object program Memory Search Searches for the specified value from the specified memory area Copy Copies the specified memory area to the specified address Compare Compares the specified two memory areas Fill Fills the specified value in the specified memory area Refresh Forces a manual update of the contents of all the Memory windows open Configure Overlay 366 7 ENESAS Selects the target section group when the overlay function is used High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix H Command Line Functions The
53. To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips check box as desired To modify the toolbar name of a toolbar created by a user 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 In the Toolbars list select a toolbar which has been created by a user and whose name you want to modify 3 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar name filed 103 RENESAS 6 2 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Customizing the Tools Menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options gt To add anew menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 The first thing for you to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool Application wide tools which will be available to all of your workspaces Or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool Workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have made the choice choose the relevant section of the dialog Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide tools Name Version Madi Workspace wide tools Hitachi Mapview 1 0 Hitachi Call Walker 1 1 Modify Hitachi H Series Librarian Interf
54. Using the network HEW service When you connect to a networked project for the first time the HEW automatically connects you to the correct network HEW service This is defined using machine name If the service cannot be found using the machine name in the workspace then the dialog displayed in figure 10 5 is shown Simply type or browse to the machine where the service is located and click OK If you want to be the server machine then leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine 147 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Select Server Location 20 x Use local machine Use network machine Cancel Access Computer name Po Browse Figure 10 5 Select machine name If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine This dialog is displayed in figure 10 6 Clicking OK then connects your machine to the new location High Performance Embedded Workshop x A Workspace is registered to be shared on computer PA00552 you are registered to run server locally do you want to change your server registration Figure 10 6 Select machine name Note If the network is running multiple HEW workspaces with the network service enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is se
55. Window Functions sssesssseeseeeseessresreserersresstersressrersseensreseressees 363 Appendix H Command Line Functions cccssessssecsssccsssesssseeseseesesees 367 Appendix I Notes on HEW seco scctustesausaccutioedessessnddcanneractanaetactueumnanmeateeubees 369 xii 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual HEW Part RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 Overview The functions for HEW version V 3 0 06 are explained in this manual This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop It is intended to give users who are new to Windows applications filling in the details that are required by later chapters 11 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 1 1 illustrates this graphically C PROJECT C PROJECT C PROJECT RKSPACE WO Figure 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For exampl
56. Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first We need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything 199 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 Method for Activating HEW To activate the HEW follow the procedure listed below 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer and the user system then turn on the user system 2 Select High performance Embedded Workshop from Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop of Programs in the Start menu 3 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Welcome Options OK Cancel Open a recent project workspace Administration fa Browse to another project workspace Figure 4 2 Welcome Dialog Box Create a new project workspace radio button Creates a new workspace Open a recent project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace and displays the history of the opened workspace Browse to another project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace this radio button is used when the history of the open
57. a H 00003 54 Oxff e H OOO00FfE Oxtf 2 H 000a Oxff48 Figure 6 19 Watch Window Displaying Array Elements 325 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 13 Stepping Through a Program The HEW provides a range of step menu commands that allow efficient program debugging Table 6 2 Step Option Menu Command Description Step In Executes each statement including statements within functions Step Over Executes a function call in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the statement following the statement in the program that called the function Step Steps the specified times repeatedly at a specified rate 6 13 1 Executing Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first statement of the called function e To step through the sort function select Step In from the Debug menu or click the Step In button on the toolbar Figure 6 20 Step In Button 326 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 0x00002036 0x0000203e 0x00002046 Ox0000204e 0x00002056 0x0000205e Ox0000206a 0x00002070 0x00002080 0x00002088 0x0000208c 0x00002096 0x00002088 0x000020ba 0x000020e2 Ox000020f6 Ox0000211a 0x00002136 O0x00002154 all ovoid Sample sort long a s4 0 s5 0 s6 0 s 0 s8 0 s9 0 long t int i J Kk gap gap 53 while gap gt 0 for
58. a program For example to set a PC breakpoint at the sort function call e Select by double clicking the Editor column on the line containing the sort function call 0x0000104 void tutorial void 0x00001054 Ox0000105e Ox00001066 Ox00001072 Ox0000107a 0x00001088 0x000010b6 0x000010c4 Ox000010d2 Ox000010e0 Ox000010f 0 O0x00001100 O0x00001110 0x00001120 0x00001130 0x00001140 Nynnnniisn long a 10 long j int 13 class Sample p_sam p_sam i m forl i 0 0 i Df j ae sO 0 lt 0 M i 43 ali p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt change a p_sam gt s0 aL0 p_sam gt sl aL1 p_sam gt s a p_sam gt s3 al3 n cam gt eR al l Figure 6 6 Source Window Setting a PC Breakpoint The symbol will appear on the line containing the sort function This shows that a PC breakpoint has been set 316 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 8 Setting Registers Set values of the program counter and the stack pointer before executing the program e Select Registers from the CPU submenu of the View menu The Register window is displayed Register Value H OOOSFBDS H 00007945 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H OOOOFF76 H OOOOFF46 H 0010E0 H 00 0 Figure 6 7 Register Window e To change the value of the program counter PC double click the value area in the Register window with the mouse The following dialo
59. ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog which can be accessed via the Options gt Build Phases figure 3 2 On the left hand side 40 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual are the phases that are defined in the current project Figure 3 2 shows a standard set of build phases The remainder of this chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog provides Build Phases M H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator H8S H8 300 C C Compiler M H8S H8 300 Assembler Mody Henare Move Up Move Davy Figure 3 2 Build Phases Dialog RENESAS 41 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 2 Creating a Custom Build Phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase Select Options gt Build Phases to invoke the Build Phases dialog figure 3 2 and then click the Add button This will invoke the new build phase wizard dialog figure 3 3a The first step as shown in figure 3 3a asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc
60. access level select the user you wish to modify and then click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes gt To remove an existing user to the system 1 2 3 4 3 6 7 146 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed Select the user you wish to remove in the users list Press the remove button Then click OK to save the access rights changes RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual User access rights E 3 User access rights fe test Users Accesslevel Add Admin Guest R Access Administrator C Full read write access Read urite file access only C Read only access Figure 10 4 Access rights dialog 10 1 4 Changing your password To change your password 1 Log into the HEW network database you are changing your password for Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the password button Enter your new password and confirm it in the second edit box Click OK Then click OK to save the password change OVO ge e 10 1 5
61. and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt lt button The deselected function will be moved from Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box Setting a Function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without setting the functions 5 11 4 Debugging an Overlay Program This section explains the settings for using the overlay functions Displaying Section Group When the overlay mode is used that is when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing Memory gt Configure Overlay 21x Section Name Gk Cancel Figure 5 37 Overlay Dialog Box at Opening This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box The Address list box displays the address ranges used in the overlay program Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box 275 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 21x Address Section Name OOFFRSO0 OOFFRSDB E OK a Cancel Figure 5 38 Overlay Dialog Box Address Range Selected The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the sele
62. another location leave the Maintain link check box unchecked If you would like the HEW to use this location instead of the current session location check the Maintain link check box 6 Click the OK button Release Source a SessionH8_soo_E1 01 SYSTEMhsf Save as type Sessions hsf x Cancel T Maintain link Z Figure 4 32 Save Session Dialog Box 226 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 3 Saving Session Information e To save a session Select File gt Save Session 7tENESAS 227 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 5 Connecting the Emulator Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator 1 Connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation Select Debug settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box It is possible to register the download module or the command chain that is automatically executed at activation For details on the Debug Settings dialog box refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation When the dialog box is closed after setting the Debug Settings dialog box the emulator will automatically be connected 2 Connecting the emulator without the setting at emulator activation Connect the emulator by simply switching the session file to one in which the setting for the emulator use has been registered Jaka r ir IE ia ao a IE PFE Detus A DetautSe
63. area floating or flag bits by selecting an option from the combo box the contents of this list depend on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 245 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 4 4 Using Register Contents Use the value contained in a CPU register by specifying the register name prefixed by the character e g R1 PC R6L or HER3 when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory window 5 4 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 5 5 Operating Memory This section describes how to control memory contents such as viewing a memory area in different formats filling and moving a memory block and loading and verifying a load module file 5 5 1 Viewing a Memory Area To look at a memory area choose View gt CPU gt Memory with the Ctrl M accelerator or click the View Memory toolbar button gah to open the Memory window This will open the Format dialog box shown in figure 5 14 HOO0000F F Format Byte amp 1 Display Value As ANSI character x Bytes Gount For One Line fie Byte
64. bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar gt To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window Or push the right mouse button anywhere inside a floating window and select Hide on the pop up menu To display the Workspace window or the Output window Select View gt Workspace or View gt Output respectively 1 2 5 The Editor Window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style where each text file has a separate tab as shown in figure 1 17 The editor contains a gutter on the left hand side of the window The gutter in HEW can be configured to contain many columns Each column can refer to a different component s capability In figure 1 16 the editor is displayed with the debugger address column and the standard column The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the cursor over the column a tool tip is displayed showing
65. be given to any new file of that file group when it is first added to the project 3 4 C C source file C source file E C source file Default Options Figure B 1 Options Dialog File List 8 I selected Build gt Build All but the dependencies in the Projects tab of the Workspace window is not updated while selecting Build gt Build updates the dependencies Build gt Build All does not update the dependencies in the Projects tab of the Workspace window To update the dependencies select Build gt Update All Dependencies 348 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix C Regular Expressions The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find or replace operation These characters are listed in table C 1 and are detailed in the following pages Table C 1 Regular Expression Characters Character Meaning Matches one or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches a aa aaa and so on Matches zero or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string a aa and so on Matches zero or one occurrence s of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string and a and Specify a cardinality range formed as follows m n This co
66. be set in this window differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help 336 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 17 Hardware Break Function A method is given below in which the address bus condition is set under Break Condition 1 as hardware break conditions e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Eventpoint window is displayed e The PC breakpoint that has been previously set is deleted Click the Eventpoint window with the right hand mouse button and select Delete All from the popup menu to cancel all PC breakpoints that have been set e To set a Break condition 1 click the Break condition tab e Select a line of Break condition 1 in the Eventpoint window When highlighted double click this line Tutorial High performance Embedded Workshop File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help jOoscaa 4 eeloTol emlp o Esieos 2 sel melm lial da amp al el a lfc a es amp Peas fesos Eose Fy P ES 2 m a cats lHBMAPeS mae eranl lalala a s e a Tutorial a 5 Tutorial E Assembly source fi B E C header file E sbrkh 2 sorth 8 stackscth B C source file E dbscte 8 sbrke B C source file JE resetpre cpp E sort cpp 8 tutorialepp EN a a I Only program fetched address after 5 Dependencies H1002 ae Loo o o __ Non user
67. bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function gt Editing a watch item s value Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the popup menu The Edit Value dialog box opens Edit Value Expression a l Current H oooo0000 OxOfffffbO Value New Value Cancel Figure 5 45 Edit Value Dialog Box Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value 283 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Deleting a Watch Item To delete a watch item select it and choose Delete from the popup menu The item is deleted and the Watch window is updated To delete all watch items choose Delete All from the popup menu All items are deleted and the Watch window is updated Specifying Realtime Update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time When an R mark is displayed in bold face the value of the variable will be updated in realtime during user program execution A popup menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window e Auto Update Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time e Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold R s and updat
68. click the Step Out toolbar button E or choose Debug gt Step Out 268 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 6 Multiple Steps You can step several instructions at a time by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing Debug gt Step The Step Program dialog box is displayed Step Program Steps H 00000001 Delay 25 seconds x Cancel 7 Step over calls I Source level step Figure 5 34 Step Program Dialog Box Steps Number of steps to be executed Delay seconds Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped 0 to 3 seconds can be selected in 0 5 second units Step Over Calls Selecting this box steps over function calls Source Level Step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level Clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key starts step execution 269 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 10 Stopping Your Program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt button and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 5 10 1 Stopping Execution When your program is running the Stop toolbar button is enabled ared STOP sign and when the program has stopped it is disabled the
69. do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file in the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location file see appendix C Placeholders for more information on placeholders and their uses Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to create the application 6 Click Modify to modify an application The Modify Application dialog will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click OK 7 Click OK to set the application for the selected file group 23 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Options menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using For example if you are using a compiler assembler and linker then there will be three menu options each one referring to one of the tools gt To set options for a build phase 1 Select the options menu and find the phase whose options you would like to modify Select this option 2 A dialog will be i
70. even if specified conditions have been satisfied 291 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 17 Delete Initializes the condition of the selected break channel To retain the details of the break channel but not have it cause a break when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 5 13 16 Disable 5 13 18 Delete All Initializes conditions of all break channels 5 13 19 Go to Source Only enabled when one break channel is selected Opens the Source window at address of break channel If an address value has not been set to the break channel this option cannot be used 5 13 20 Sequential Conditions Sets the sequential condition of the break channel 5 13 21 Editing Break Conditions Handlings for settings other than PC breakpoints and break conditions are common The following describes examples of such handling 5 13 22 Modifying Break Conditions Select a break condition to be modified and choose Edit from the popup menu to open the dialog box for the event which allows the user to modify the break conditions The Edit menu is only available when one break condition is selected 5 13 23 Enabling Break Conditions Select a break condition and choose Enable from the popup menu to enable the selected break condition 5 13 24 Disabling Break Conditions Select a break condition and choose Disable from the popup menu to disable the selected break condition
71. example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog figure 2 7 This is invoked by selecting Project gt File Extensions This dialog displays all of the extensions and file groups which are defined within the current workspace Group Absolute file Assembly include file Cancel Assembly list file Add Assembly source file C header file R Remove list file C source file Open with C header file C list file CPU information file Fynandad assamhlu source file Figure 2 7 File Extensions Dialog 19 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The File Extensions list shown in figure 2 7 is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions themselves whilst on the right are the file groups Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc as shown in figure 2 8 CICI C SRC ASM MAR LIB URE Assembler source files C source files Library files Figure 2 8 File Extensions and Groups When cre
72. exceed check box and then specify the error count limit in the edit field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of warnings exceed check box and then specify the warning count limit in the edit field to the right Note Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the command line environment and initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary 57 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 7 Logging Build Output If you would like to write the results of each build to file then invoke the Customize dialog by selecting Tools gt Customize and select the Log tab figure 3 19 Set the Generate log file check box and then enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Customize P Browsen Figure 3 19 Tools Customize Dialog Log Tab 58 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 8 Changing Toolchain Version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Ver
73. file or files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder then the system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file to the file list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Click the Add Files toolbar button ies or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add Files menu option When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only To check that the add files operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the project folder whose files you want to check 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out who did so 138 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following 8 oper
74. from the Access size combo box Verify Memory For mat File name TTF Offset address ici Access size fi 7 Figure 5 21 Verify Memory Dialog Box 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled This is done by checking Lock Refresh in the popup menu The Memory window will be grayed 5 5 12 Updating the Window Contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated This is done by checking Refresh in the popup menu 254 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Open the Compare Memory dialog box by selecting Memory gt Compare from the main menu or by selecting Compare from the popup menu of the Memory window Cancel H o0000000 Start Compare Hoooo0000 Format Byte amp 1 x Figure 5 22 Compare Memory Dialog Box Enter the comparison format Format the start address Begin and the end address End of the source memory area and the start address Start Compare of the destination memory area If the memory block is already highlighted in the Memory window the start and end addresses will be automatically filled in when the Compare Memory dialog box is opened If there is a mismatch t
75. in the host computer s slot Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer 3 The hardware is now recognized and the driver is automatically installed Note When Add New Hardware Wizard is displayed select the Search for the best driver for your device Recommended radio button and then the Specify a location check box to select the path to be searched for drivers The location must be specified according to the emulator type as listed below When using the PCI card emulator lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCI98 When using the PCMCIA card emulator lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCMCIA 98 lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive letter 180 7 ENESAS 3 2 2 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Installing under Windows NT 4 0 Operating System 1 When the emulator is a PCI card 1 2 5 Shut the operating system down and turn off the power to the host computer Insert the PCI card emulator in a slot on the host computer Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer Start the host computer and log on with an administrator level user name Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator For a component be sure to select PCI Card Driver There is a check box for selecting the type name of the product under the PCI Card Driver component Select the appropriate type name If the correct name is not selected the correct driver will not be installed and the emulator wil
76. invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below gt To create and send a HEW bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Create Bug Report 2 Detailed information is generated from your HEW system This may take some time The bug report dialog is then displayed This is shown in figure 12 1 3 Itis possible to then add additional information concerning the exact issue you have found in the large edit box 4 Once you are happy with your report you can choose the method of sending the report in the submit drop list This has e mail entries and an entry for printing the report 5 Then click submit This will send the report Submit a Bug Report x You may submit a Bug Report through e mail or by conventional means The box below contains information gathered from your machine and any additional information about the state of the software if a crash occurred You may check and edit the acquired data and should add any additional information at the end of the text RAM Information Load 0 Total RAM 267 837 440 bytes Free RAM 65 019 904 bytes Page File 384 319 488 bytes Page File Free 189 648 896 bytes Total Virtual 2 147 352 576 bytes Virtual Free 231 693 824 bytes No project information available
77. is automatically connected 209 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button Welcome r Options C Create a new project workspace 2 Open a recent project workspace Figure 4 12 Welcome Dialog Box 2 The Open Workspace dialog box is displayed Select a directory in which you have created a workspace After that select the workspace file hws and press the Open button Open Workspace Look in amp oT e ey EA Tutorial ee Tutorial hws File name fT utorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws x Cancel Z Figure 4 13 Open Workspace Dialog Box 210 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 This activates the HEW and recovers the state of the selected workspace at the time it was saved When the saved state information of the selected workspace includes connection to the emulator the emulator will automatically be connected To connect the emulator when the saved state information does not include connection to the emulator refer to section 4 5 Connecting the Emulator 7tENESAS 211 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 4 3 1 Setting at Emulator Activation When the emulator is a
78. key choosing Debug gt Halt or clicking on the Halt toolbar button 2 The Go To Cursor feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 266 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 4 Running from a Specified Address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program Program Counter H o0000000 Reset Go Temporary PC Breakpoints Cancel Figure 5 33 Run Program Dialog Box The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program Counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work Clicking the Go button starts execution depending on the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions 267 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 5 Single Step To debug your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instructi
79. level click the mark at the left of the register name or select the register name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the gt key The register display will expand to show the names of register bits and values Clicking the mark at the left of the expanded register name will close the register bits display 5 6 3 Manually Loading an I O File To manually load an I O file right click on the IO window and select the Load IO file menu item on the IO window pop up menu The standard Find File dialog box is displayed Simply select the file you require to load and click OK The I O file will be loaded into the IO window For details on the I O file format refer to appendix E I O File Format 5 6 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents To edit the value in an I O register type hexadecimal values directly into the window To enter more complex expressions double click or press the Enter key on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register Note The IO window displays the contents defined in H8xxxx io Editing those contents adds or deletes the registers to be displayed For the contents to be described as H8xxxx io refer to appendix D I O File Format The following directory contains H8xxxx io xxxx means the
80. mask z IZ Dont care Value aT H 0000794b Oxff4e low byte Hieh byte G Word HO00059e2 Oxff52 H 0000446b Oxff56 p Read Write HO00041c6 Oxff5a Read irite C Read C Write H 00003f54 Oxtf5e H 00002781 Oxft62 2 a Cared tool 4 A ET Waten1 A watcn2 A watchs A watcha 4 gt Build A Debug A Find in Fies_J_Yersion Conitol_ Ready Read write 48 64 i jlggdaaaa Figure 6 34 HEW Window Break condition 1 e The Break condition 1 dialog box is displayed e Clear the Don t care check box in the Address group box 337 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Select the Only program fetched address after radio button and enter H 10D2 as the value in the Address edit box Break condition 1 condition Address ti Cc Address Only program fetched address after Address H1002 Mask Non user mask E Data Jv Dont care Value C Low byte High byte Word Read Write Read Write C Read f White Figure 6 35 condition Page Break condition 1 Dialog Box e Click the OK button e The first point display in the State line changes from Disable to Enable e The first point display in the Condition line changes from None to Address H 000010D2 Tutorial cpp 47 pcafter e Set the program counter value PC H 400 that was set in section 6 8 Setting Regi
81. menu option This dialog allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Option menu option For further details on how to use and configure the editor refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor 1 2 6 The Output Window The Output window by default has four tabs on display The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file then the error will be displayed in the build tab along with the source file name and line number To quickly locate a problem double click on the error to jump to the source file and line Build A Debug A Find in Files A Version Control 7 Figure 1 18 Output Window The Debug tab shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window 10 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Find in Files tab displays the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit gt Find in Files menu option the toolbar button For further details on how to u
82. methods a and b below For operation during connection refer to section 3 5 System Check a Connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation Select Debug settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box Itis possible to register the download module or the command chain that is automatically executed at activation For details on the Debug Settings dialog box refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 208 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual After the Debug Settings dialog box has been set when the dialog box is closed the emulator is connected b Connecting the emulator without the setting at emulator activation The emulator can be easily connected by switching the session file that the setting for the emulator use has been registered test Hieh p File Edit Views Options Bui Memory Tools Window Help jOscna S s eeloT allem l n S asle oe 2 Jaka fel recaia as A Detautsession ER 4aes2 Session E10T SYSTE lm acarts TFORRBoes 1O i test Figure 4 11 Selecting the Session File In the list box that is circled in figure 4 11 select the session file name including the character string that has been set in the Target name text box in figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 dialog box The setting for using the emulator has been registered in this session file After selected the emulator
83. of the fields and click OK This should set the user and password on the Tools gt Options network tab It is now possible to leave the Tools gt Options dialog When the dialog is closed you are asked if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost When the workspace is re opened a dialog is displayed which asks you to log back into the system Once you have logged in a dialog is displayed which shows your current access rights For example if you are the admin user the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the HEW server window is opened and the network facilities are enabled RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Network database access Login User Password Password Figure 10 2 Initial setup of network tab Change password Xx Cancel Password pooo Confirm password by retyping below Figure 10 3 Password dialog 145 RENESAS 10 1 3 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the HEW system e Administrator Full access to every aspect of
84. on the define template bookmark toolbar button T The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Use the Template name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking OK saves the template changes and dismisses the dialog 4 12 3 Inserting a Template gt To insert a template 1 Select a template in the toolbar then click the insert template toolbar button TR select Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template or select Templates gt Insert Template from the local menu The dialog is dismissed and the chosen template is added to the current editor window Note It is also possible to use the defined keyboard shortcut or drag the template from the templates view 84 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 4 Brace Matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within an if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a match brace feature which highlights text between braces of type and gt To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Click the match braces toolbar button press CTRL B select Edit gt Match Braces or select Match Braces from t
85. performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual relevant However at this stage it is worth taking a few moments to familiarize yourself with the options that each menu provides 1 2 3 The Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options which you will use the most often There are eight default toolbars Bookmarks Debug Debug Run Editor Search Standard Templates Version Control and Difference as shown in figure 1 3 to 1 11 Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools gt Customize menu option see chapter 6 Customizing the Environment for further information Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Toggle Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks ETT Figure 1 3 Bookmarks Toolbar TOL Toolkit View Disassembly Command Line Print the Disassembly window Enable Disable Breakpoint Radix Connect to debug platform Disconnect debug platform Slag jeng z am Toggle Breakpoint a m Figure 1 4 Debug Toolbar Reset CPU Step Over Go to Cursor Step Out Reset Go Set PC to Cursor Go Step Halt l L AS OP E Figure 1 5 Debug Run Toolbar Save File Copy Match Braces Open File Save All Cut Paste Insert Template New File Print Toggle Bookmark Osag a tB OTa Figure 1 6 Editor Toolbar Find in Files Find Next Search String Find Find Previous l a _ aa Figure 1 7 Search Toolbar RENESAS
86. processor Select the Colour tab Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The color System refers to the current window foreground and background settings in control panel Click OK for the new colors to take effect gt To create new keyword groups 1 2 3 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the file type in the tree to which you wish to add the new keyword group Click Add underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box will be displayed figure 4 11 Enter the name of the keyword group in the Category Title field then click OK to create the new keyword group Add Category Category Title pao 1 1x _ ores Figure 4 11 Add Category Dialog gt To create new keywords 1 2 3 80 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the item underneath the source view icon in the tree you wish to modify the syntax highlighting for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor Select the Keywords tab figure 4 12 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Format Views 2f xi E Source Colour Font Keywords Comments All E Assembly include file E Assembly list file Assembly so
87. read write cycle conditions Option Description Read Write radio button Sets the read write cycle conditions as break conditions Read radio button Sets read cycles as break conditions Write radio button Sets write cycles as break conditions 295 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 14 Viewing the Trace Information For the description on the trace function refer to section 2 2 Trace Functions 5 14 1 Opening the Trace Window To open the Trace window choose View gt Code gt Trace or click the Trace toolbar button 5 14 2 Acquiring Trace Information The acquired trace information is displayed in the Trace window Trace Window Address Instruction Source 00002110 H 20EC 8 00002110 H 20EC 8 00002116 spregld2 3 24 00001128 Figure 5 51 Trace Window This window displays the following trace information items PTR Pointer to a location in the trace buffer 0 for the last executed instruction IP The amount of acquired trace information Type Type of branch BRANCH branch source Address Instruction address Instruction Instruction mnemonic Source The C C or assembly language source program Label Label information It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Trace window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To di
88. running from the current PC address click the Go toolbar button E or choose Debug gt Go To continue running from a specified address which is not the stop address change the PC value in one of the following ways and click the Go toolbar button or choose Debug gt Go e Change the PC value in the Register window Refer to section 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents e Place the text cursor not the mouse cursor on a target line in the Source or Disassembly window and choose Set PC Here from the popup menu 265 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 3 Running to the Cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may only want to run a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute You can do this using the Go To Cursor feature gt How to use the Go To Cursor 1 Make sure that the Source or Disassembly window is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the text cursor on the address at which you wish to stop by either clicking in the Address field or using the cursor keys 3 Choose Go To Cursor from the popup menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes 1 If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens code execution can be stopped by pressing the Esc
89. s When a breakpoint is disabled the breakpoint will remain in the list when specified conditions have been satisfied a break will not occur 5 13 9 Delete Removes the selected breakpoint To retain the details of the breakpoint but not have it cause a break when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 5 13 8 Disable 5 13 10 Delete All Removes all breakpoints 5 13 11 Go to Source Only enabled when one breakpoint is selected Opens the Source window at the address of the breakpoint 288 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 12 Set Break Dialog Box Set Break Address Address H1 03C Cancel Figure 5 48 Set Break Dialog Box This dialog box specifies break conditions A breakpoint address to be set is specified in the Address edit box Up to 255 breakpoints can be specified When Address is selected if an overloaded function or class name including a member function is specified in address the Select Function dialog box opens Clicking the OK button sets the break conditions Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting the break conditions 289 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Notes on Setting the Set Break Dialog Box 1 When an odd address is set the address is rounded down to an even address 2 A software break is accomplished by replacing instructions Accordingly it can b
90. s Manual 2 When Demonstration is selected in the E10T emulator note the following The Demonstration is a program for the simulator When using a program to be generated delete the Printf statement 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed New Project 5 H8300 Simulator H8 300H4 Simulator H8 300HN Simulator H8 300L Simulator H8S 20004 Simulator CJH8S 2000N Simulator H8S 26004 Simulator H8S 2600N Simulator ox E10T SYSTEM Target type AI Targets 7 lt Back n Finish Cancel Figure 4 9 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box Check H8 xxxx E10T SYSTEM and click the Next button Mark other products as required 207 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator New Projec Target name Configuration name Debug H8 oo _E10T SYSTEM Detail options ltem lt Back _New gt Finish Cancel Figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box This is the end of the emulator setting Exit the Project Generator depending on the instructions on the screen The HEW is activated 5 After the HEW has been activated connect the emulator However it is not needed to connect the emulator immediately after the HEW has been activated To connect the emulator use one of the
91. save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select File gt Save All or click the save all files toolbar button Gi 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 3 If any of the files have been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed 4 3 4 Opening a File gt To open a file 1 Select File gt Open or click the open file toolbar button or press CTRL 0 2 An open file dialog box will be displayed Use the directory browser on the right to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last five files that you have opened and adds them to the file menu under the Recent Files sub menu This gives you a shortcut to opening files which you have used recently gt To open a recently used file Select the File gt Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file You can also open a file via the Projects tab of the Workspace window Either double click the file you want to
92. session properties Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 31 Session Properties Name SessionH8hoom_E10T_ SYSTEM i Location C Hew2 T ools Renesas DebugComp Platform E10T Cancel Last modified 16 15 32 Thursday January 30 2003 I Read only Figure 4 31 Session Properties Dialog Box 225 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e To make a session read only 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 2 Select the session you would like to make read only 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 31 4 Check the Read only check box to make the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally 5 Click the OK button e To save a session with a different name 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 2 Select the session you would like to save 3 Click the Save as button to display the Save Session dialog box figure 4 32 4 Specify the location to save the new file 5 If you want to export the session file to
93. set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 c toals mytool exel ene lt Back Newt __ Cancel _ Figure 3 3d New Build Phase Dialog Step 3 44 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The fourth and final step figure 3 3e allows you to specify any environment variables which the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 BE Y Does the command require any environment variables to be set If so enter them into the list below Moditp Hemove i T Read Output On Fly lt Back Einish Cancel Figure 3 3e New Build Phase Dialog Step 4 To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 3 4 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the list of the fourth step To modify an environment variables select the variable in the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable
94. started For details refer to the High performance Embedded Workshop Tutorial provided when you purchase the toolchain In this section we omit description of the settings for the toolchain If you have purchased the toolchain the following dialog box is displayed New Project Workspace Projects Application Workspace Name E Assembly Application ftest ee Demonstration Project Name Fy Empty Application fet SSCS Import Makefile Library Directory jox Hew3 test Browse CPU family Has H8 300 7 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard v Properties Cancel Figure 4 8 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Here for example enter test Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered CPU family drop down list box Select the target CPU family Tool chain drop down list box Select the target toolchain name when using the toolchain Otherwise select None Project type list box Select the project type to be used Notes 1 For the E10T emulator the following project types are the same Application and H8 xxxx E10T Emulator Application Assembly Application and H8 xxxx E10T Emulator Assembly Application Empty Application and H8 xxxx E10T Emulator Empty Application 206 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User
95. that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users gt To check in edits made to a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check In Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check In menu option 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone gt To undo a check out of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combinat
96. the HEW title bar If a workspace is open then the same workspace closedown procedure is followed as described in the previous section 1 6 Component System Overview The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the debugger component is not installed you will not have the Debug menu in the HEW main window 12 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general functions of the HEW whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The Build Process The typical build process is outlined in figure 2 1 This may not be the exact build process which your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW e g you may not have a compiler for instance In
97. the active window Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search Select Edit gt Replace press CTRL H or select Replace from the editor window s local menu A replace dialog box will be displayed figure 4 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field RENESAS 5 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with into the Replace with field or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box c E 2 x Find what fetr ing x Replace with fru meric 7 Replace I Match whole word only ia h Replace All lection Match case Selec J Regular expression Whole file Cancel C All open files 4 5 4 Figure 4 4 Replace Dialog If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box If your search string uses regular ex
98. the tutorial select the Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button When the Open workspace dialog box is opened specify the following directory lt HEW3 installation directory gt Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E10T Tutorial 186 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual After the directory has been specified select the following file and click the Open button Open Workspace Look in ja E10T gt e acea Tutorial eee Tutorial hws File name Tutorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws 7 Cancel Z h Figure 3 4 Open Workspace Dialog Box 187 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 The Select Emulator mode dialog box is displayed Select Emulator mode Device HB xxx Mode Download emulator firmware C Does not download emulator firmware Writing Flash memory Cancel Figure 3 5 Select Emulator mode Dialog Box Select the device name in use from the Device drop down list box The following items are selected in the Mode group box Download emulator firmware The emulator s firmware is downloaded to the flash memory Select this item when the emulator is firstly activated the version of the emulator s software is updated or the ID code is changed Note The emulator occupies the user s flash memory area according to the target MCUs For details refer to the additi
99. these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Dialog General Tab 132 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed gt To login i e specify a user name and password 1 Click the Log in button The dialog shown in figure 8 14 will be displayed 2 Enter your user name into the User name field 3 Enter your password into the Password field 4 5 Click OK to set the new user name and password If there is any inconsistency between the two Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field versions of the password which you entered then you will be requested to type your password again User name HARK Gr Password ee Confirm password by retyping it below p Figure 8 14 Log in Dialog 133 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 4 Controlling Execution The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 allows you to control t
100. to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 5 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 6 The results of the search are shown in the Located Tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click Uninstall to uninstall a component 7 Click Exit to exit the dialog A component may only be uninstalled if it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool which is registered then the dialog shown in figure 5 9 will be displayed In such a case you must return to the Tools Administration dialog via Tools gt Administration unregister the tool and then invoke the tool uninstaller again 95 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop Figure 5 9 Unable to Uninstall Tool If a tool is not registered with the HEW then the dialog shown in figure 5 10 will be displayed when the Unregister button is clicked This confirmation dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the Yes but
101. tutorial has described the major features of the emulator and the use of the HEW Sophisticated debugging can be carried out by using the emulation functions that the emulator offers This provides for effective investigation of hardware and software problems by accurately isolating and identifying the conditions under which such problems arise 344 7 ENESAS Table A 1 lists the components of the Tiny SLP E10T emulator High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix A Components of the E10T Emulator Table 1 1 Components of the Emulator HS0005TCM01H or HS0005TCI01H Classi Quan fication Component Appearance tity Remarks Hard Card emulator 1 HSxxxxTCM01H ware HSxxxxTCM01H POMCI 14 pin type Model HS0005TCM01H Depth 85 6 mm HSxxxxTCI01H or AAT SO mm Model HS0005TC101H Height 5 0 mm Mass 28 0 g HSxxxxTCl01H PCI 14 pin type Depth 122 0 mm Width 96 0 mm Mass 78 0 g User system interface 1 HSxxxxTCM01H cable O PCMCIA 14 pin type Length 800 mm Mass 46 0 g HSxxxxTCl01H PCI 14 pin type Length 1500 mm Mass 90 0 g Soft H8 xxxx E10T emulator 1 HSxxxxTCM01SR ware setup program CSD H8 Family E10T Emulator HS0005TCM01HJ User s Manual HSOOO5TCMO1HE and Notes on Connecting the HSxxxxTCM01HJPn and H8 xxxx HSxxxxTCM01HEPn n 1 2 3 7tENESAS provided on a CD R 345 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 346 7 ENESAS L High pe
102. two Figure 4 9 shows the split bar button which is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any text window Figure 4 9 Split Bar Button gt To split a window Double click on the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed move the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window gt To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button gt To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 78 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 10 Configuring Text The following sections detail how to change the appearance of the text displayed in the editor windows 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font gt To change the editor font 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the Source icon in the tree figure 4 10 2 Select the desired font from the Font list 3 Select the size of the font from the Size list 4 Click OK to confirm the new editor setting
103. user program is temporarily stopped When the color of the R mark is black a value has been updated by reading the data Notes 1 This function can be set per variable or per element or body for structures of data 2 The color of an R in the Name column changes according to the monitoring settings 3 The information is lost when it is scrolled out of the Watch window or when the window is closed 4 A variable that is allocated to a register cannot be selected for monitoring 280 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Adding a Watch Item Use the Add Watch dialog box in the Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window gt To use Add Watch from the Watch window Open the Watch window Choose Add Watch from the popup menu The Add Watch dialog box opens Add Watch Variable or expression fa Cancel Figure 5 43 Add Watch Dialog Box Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the Source window and dropped into the Watch window Note Ifthe variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be blank or set to a question mark 281 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Expanding a Watch Item If a watch item is a pointer array or stru
104. user system is used for second time or later Input the user system reset signal Figure 3 1 Emulator Preparation Flow Chart 179 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 2 Emulator Installation Insert the CD R in the host computer s CD ROM drive and then execute Setup exe from the root directory of the CD R Follow the instructions given by the installation wizard to install the emulator Since hardware settings are also made during installation the installation procedure differs depending on the operating system or interface PCI or PCMCIA being used Follow the installation steps carefully depending on the environment you are using 3 2 1 Installing under Windows 98 or Windows Me Operating System 1 When the emulator is a PCI card 1 Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator when selecting the component type during installation be sure to select PCI Card Driver 2 Shut the operating system down and turn off the power to the host computer 3 Insert the PCI card emulator in a slot on the host computer Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer 4 Restart the host computer The hardware is now recognized and the driver is automatically installed 2 When the emulator is a PCMCIA card 1 Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator when the component type has to be selected during installation be sure to select PC Card Driver PCMCIA 2 Insert the PCMCIA card emulator
105. viewed or edited Only one window is active at anytime This window is called the active window or current window and its title bar will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure 4 1 All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible e Press CTRL TAB to cycle through the windows one after another e Select the window by name from the Window menu e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window When a file has been edited an asterisk is appended to the window s title bar The asterisk remains there until the file is saved The asterisk is also removed if all of the edited changes are undone in the current window Z ERE KEK KKK HK KH KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK JE JE JE JE E JE E E E E E E E FILE dbsct c DATE Hon Jun 23 2003 DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section CPU TYPE H857 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 2 6 Z ERARE EE EE EE E E JE E E JE E JE IE JE IE JE ME JE JE JE JE JE JE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE ME ME E E EE pragma section DSEC static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data se char r
106. which the application is running The E10T emulator hereafter referred to as the emulator is a software and hardware development support tool for application systems using the Tiny series or Super Low Power series microcomputer The main unit of the emulator is connected through the dedicated debugging interface to the user system The user system can be debugged under the conditions similar to the actual application conditions The emulator enables debugging anywhere indoors or out The host computer for controlling the emulator must be an IBM PC compatible machine with a PCMCIA type II or PCI slot Figures 1 1 and 1 2 show the system configuration using the emulator Host computer PC with PCMCIA TYPE II slot f PCMCIA card emulator ELIT Vg P ALLER ALL SS User system interface cable ar XXXX Ce ig Insert into the PCMCIA TYPE II slot Ay Fi 4 Connect to the connector lt User system Figure 1 1 System Configuration with the Emulator PCMCIA Card Emulator Used 167 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual User system interface cable PCI card emulator H8 xxxx lt a into the PCI slot n EEEN User system Host computer PC with PCI slot Figure 1 2 System Configuration with the Emulator PCI Card Emulator Used 168 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The emulator
107. you can type the directory into the Directory field manually The Project type list displays all of the available project types e g application library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list Click OK to create the project and insert it into the workspace When a new project is being inserted the CPU family and tool chain cannot be specified as these properties are already defined by the workspace i e all projects within the same workspace target the same CPU family and toolchain Insert Project 24 x Existing project Browse 34 Figure 2 23 Insert Project Dialog RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To insert an existing project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed 2 Set the Existing Project option 3 Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click Browse to search for it graphically 4 Click OK to insert the existing project into the workspace Note When an existing project is being inserted into a workspace the CPU family and tool chain upon which that project is based must match those of the current workspace If they do not then the project cannot be inserted into the workspace 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects The projects within a workspace can
108. 0T emulator components refer to section 1 1 in the additional document Notes on Connecting the H8 xxxx If the components are not complete contact our E mail address for user registration or refer to the web site 172 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 2 Emulator Functions This section describes the emulator functions They differ according to the device supported by the emulator For the usage of each function refer to section 6 Tutorial 2 1 Overview Table 2 1 gives a functional overview of the emulator For the functions of each product refer to the online help Table 2 1 Emulator Functions No Item Function 1 User program execution Executes a program with the operating frequency within a function range guaranteed by devices e Reset emulation e Step functions Single step one step one instruction Source level step one step one source Step over a break did not occur in a subroutine Step out when the PC points to a location within a subroutine execution continues until it returns to the calling function 2 Reset function e Issues a power on reset from the HEW to the device during break 3 Trace acquisition e Branch trace function incorporated in the device four function branches min 4 Break functions e Hardware break condition one condition min PC break condition 255 points Forced break function 173 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User
109. 2952 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte Ltd 1 Harbour Front Avenue 06 10 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel lt 65 gt 6213 0200 Fax lt 65 gt 6278 8001 Colophon 1 0 H8 Family E10T Emulator User s Manual 2CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan REJ10B0034 0200H
110. 297 5 15 Viewing the Function Call History ccc eceeseeeeceeeceseceseceaecsaecseeceesaessaesaeeseesaeseeteaes 298 5 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window eee eeceeceseceecnee cee ceeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeerenes 298 5 15 22 Viewing the Source Pro Sra os siciccseccsctesstetentesscscsavecetenevetesensetdstessoesnessecteneneisants 298 5 15 3 Specifying the View ess sec cocensceocespeoveoversssecsscevstedegecideseeesserices eare E EERE 299 5 16 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image 0 eee ceecesecssecneeceecaetaeecaeesaeeseeeneeeeetenes 300 5 16 1 Opening the Image Window 00 eee cece cee cee cssecneecaeecaecaaecaeecaeeeaeseeeaeeenes 300 5 16 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeenes 303 5 16 3 Updating the Window Contents 0 0 0 cece cee ceeseecneeceeeseecaeeeaeeseesneseaeeseeeaeeeaes 303 5 16 4 Displaying the Pixel Information eee cece cese esse ceeeeaecssecseesseesseesaeeeeeeaes 304 5 17 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms 0 0 0 0 eceecesecesecseeceeeceetacecaeetaeeteeeeeeeaeeeaes 305 5 17 1 Opening the Waveform View Window uu eee ese csecseeesecneeeeeeseeseeeaeenaes 305 5 17 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeenes 306 5 17 3 Updating the Window Contents 0 0 0 cceseecseeceeseecaeeeaeeaeecaeeeaeeseeeeeenes 306 STA Zoom In DIS Play sesos a e E EAEE a EEE N 306 5 17 5 Zoom Out Display eee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecssecsaecsaecseese
111. 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the more advanced build concepts 3 1 The Build Process Revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker figure 2 1 This will be the case for most installations of the High performance Embedded Workshop However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a Build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files Figure 3 1 presents another view of the build process Kaa BEGIN Bal PHASE 1 gt Phase 1 Input Files Phase 1 Output Files S PHASE 2 gt Phase 2 Input Files Phase 2 Output Files PHASE 3 Lf Phase 3 Output Files Phase 3 Input Files PHASE X gt Phase X Input Files Phase X Output Files Figure 3 1 Build Process The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the
112. 6 p_sam gt sort a 3 resetpre cpp 0x000010c4 p_sam gt change a ti ana 0x000010d2 p_san gt s0 a 0 Op S 0x000010e0 p_sam gt s1 al1 wnload modules 0x000010 0 pean ai ap i Tutorialabs 0x00001100 p_sam gt s3 a 3 5 6 Dependencies 0x00001110 p_sam gt s4 a 4 eisie ie O E C 2 2 E Dor E Zl Connected 0xff4e E Flash memory writing HOOOO0f6 Oxff4e Flash memory write end H 000015fb 0xff52 BREAK POINT H 0000167e Oxff56 Flash memory writing H 00001ctb Oxff5a Flash memory write end H100002781 Oxff5e ISTOP ADDRESS H 00003f54 Oxtf62 ONE STEP END Lanan ata eani Debug Find in Files A Version Control 7 Read write 45 64 fi ns NM 5 Figure 6 23 HEW Window Step Out The data of variable a displayed in the Watch window is sorted in ascending order 328 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 13 3 Executing Step Over Command The Step Over command executes a function call as a single step and stops at the next statement of the main program e To step through all statements in the change function at a single step select Step Over from the Debug menu or click the Step Over button on the toolbar TP Figure 6 24 Step Over Button rial High performance Embeddi tutorialcpp Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help Denga trel oTa or asasine 2 me m i
113. 8 if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the build button and the HEW will then build the projects and configurations you have chosen If you want to build all the projects which you choose you click the build all button 5 Results from the build are displayed in the build window in the same way as the normal build process Build Multiple x Chewtest1 Debug Chewtestl Release Chewtest2 Debug hewtest2 Release hewtest3 Debug Jhewtest3 Release Jhewtest4 Debug _Jhewtest4 Release hewtest5 Debug hewtest5 Release Cancel Figure 2 18 Build Multiple Dialog 2 6 5 The Output Window When a tool executes i e compiler assembler linker etc its output is displayed in the Output window If any of the tools produce any errors or warnings then they are displayed along with the source file name and the line number at which the error is located To quickly locate a specific bug double click on a given error warning to invoke the current editor 29 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window It is often useful to display low level information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during
114. AHew2 Demo Demo cO sre B 63 C source file C Hew2 Demo Demo hwefg c C Hew2 Demo Demot inty c C Hew2 Demo Demo main c C Hew2 Demo Demo sbrk c ependencies TERE projects 4 Templates lt I Navigation Figure 2 22 File Paths Shown 2 9 Setting the Current Project 2A workspace can contain more than one project but only one of the projects can be active at any time This active project is the one which build actions and debug operations can be performed on There are three states a project can be in The current project a loaded project or an unloaded project If the project is loaded it is possible to open the project files directory and view the files It is also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project A loaded project can have tool executions performed on it from the Tools menu If the project is unloaded its icon appears grayed in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and no actions can be performed upon it You can set which project is active in a workspace gt To set a project as the current project 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option or 1 Select the project which you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu gt To load a project in
115. Click OK Properties 21 xi Name Demo H852608 Location Hew Demo_H8526004 Demo_H8526004 Demo_H85 26004 hwp Last modified 09 40 52 Monday June 23 2003 ma CPU family H8S H8 300 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Version 6 0 0 0 P Project relative file path Figure 2 25 Properties Dialog 37 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 15 User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to your workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog gt To add a user folder 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then add folder 3 Enter the name and click OK 4 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically gt To remove a user folder 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Remove folder Note that the folder must be empty and that the delete key can also be used instead of the pop up gt To modify a user folder name 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Modify folder name 3 Enter the new name in the dialog 4 Click OK 38 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS 39 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual
116. D _ secend ABS1e __sectop ABS16D _ secend ABS16D hee a pragma section BSEC 2 static const struct as char b_s z char b_e z BTBL Start address of nc End address of non 26 a a pragma section BSEC 2 static const struct as char b 3 ze char b_e n BTBL Start address of non End address of non in 32 srehan i MR sreand RM ble ail zlii zizi Figure 11 1 Difference view gt To perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive 1 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 11 2 Ensure the compare with file on drive radio button is enabled 3 Enter the first and second file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 4 Clicking the advanced button displays the dialog in 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 5 Click compare The difference view is displayed The two files being compared are loaded into each side of the split view Their names are at the top of each window gt To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in SourceSafe 1 Ensure the SourceSafe component is enabled Also note that the file must be have been added into the version control system
117. ESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix F Symbol File Format To decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol_name_1 11FCH Symbol_name_2 11FEH Symbol_name_3 1200H Symbol_name_4 END 7tENESAS 361 362 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix G Window Functions This section describes the window functions that can be used with the E10T emulator HEW Here the HEW common functions are omitted and only the emulation functions are described Table G 1 Window Functions Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks View Disassembly Ctrl D Opens the Disassembly window Command Line Ctrl L Opens the Command Line window TCL toolkit Shift amp Opens the Console window Ctrl L S Workspace Alt K Opens the Workspace window Output Alt U Opens the Output window Difference Opens the Difference window CPU Registers Ctrl R Opens the Register window Memory Ctrl M Opens the Memory window
118. Eea E TEE E E AEE EEE E TEE 341 6 18 1 Displaying the Trace Window 0 eee eeceeecesecesecesecaeceecaeeeaeseaeseeeeeeeerenes 341 6 19 Stack Trace FUNCION 00 cccccecccesees scusevececusevsee devsevchessnbssnssvecssscovensstevsen sobssoebsensbevssehseee 342 6 20 What NeXt ovisio ie taki d andere ivuni a sas oe edd aiden ela ee 344 Appendix A Components of the ELOT Emulator ue eee cess eeeneeeenees 345 Appendix B Troubles Ot scssccissicccichaveencdshasneavdssaneecdsdtnanesissaheee sa vannencdsts 347 Appendix C Regular Expressions ws sa ccvesnsauiensusaelenacguatdeny aren sauesinensssueeaweelenen 349 Appendix D PIACENOIMG Six cascsyiuceacsencedeinteeenentiatachatdecisusi ede taemtsatateniansetate 351 D 1 What is a Placeholder oo eee eecesecesecssecseecacecaeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseessesesecsaecaecssesaeesaeeaaes 351 D2 Inserting a Placeholder ss sscccsscisscesscusekssccusessscsaceduecsbeupebdeteevsvdecosssduncesdennesusacicedecleusevente 351 D 3 Available Placeholders 0 eee ee eeccescesecesecssecseecaeecaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseenaeeaecsaecaessaesaaeeneeenes 353 DA Plac holdet Wips siccvseesczisssesaeicsssatssivttaesevecssegssetbaayesenshle siete vessastegsbaShabyessvenesetsbiaasevsnesaees 355 Appendix E I O File Format crea ceeslopcotetgy caqulac tacsachveduni imp iacissautacaendens tienes 357 EA FileFomateeenan e en E E eee ARNA 357 Appendix F Symbol File Format eseeesseeeeseeseseserresseessresrrrseressrerssrensrersereree 361 Appendix G
119. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics C 7 D mh on lt D D tENESAS H8 Family E10T Emulator User s Manual H8 Family E10T HSOOO5TCMO1HE Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Renesas Electronics Rev 2 0 2004 06 www renesas com Keep safety first in your circuit designs Renesas Technology Corp puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas T
120. Figure 6 31 Eventpoint Window PC Breakpoint Setting To stop the tutorial program at the PC breakpoint the following procedure must be executed e Close the Event window e Set the program counter value PC H 400 that was set in section 6 8 Setting Registers in the Register window Click the Go button e If program execution is failed reset the device and execute again the procedures above 334 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The program runs and stops at the set PC breakpoint 0x00001088 ali j 0x000010b6 p_sam gt sort a 02000010c4 p_sam gt changela 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s0 a 0 0x000010e0 p_sam gt sl a 1 Ox000010 0 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x00001100 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x00001110 p_sam gt s4 a 4 0200001120 p_sam gt s5 a 5 0200001130 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x00001140 p_sam gt s al 0200001150 p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x00001160 p_sam gt s9 a 9 0x00001170 delete p_sam 0x0000117a 0x00001182 void abort void 0x00001186 Figure 6 32 Source Window at Execution Stop PC Break 335 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Status window displays the following contents H8 xxxx ELOT SYSTEM HS xxxx Ready Cause of last break BREAK POINT Run time count o000h000min000s210ms Emulation mode Normal Endian Big ai gt Platform Figure 6 33 Displayed Contents of the Status Window PC Break Note The items that can
121. Modules in the Debug menu Downloading is also possible by a popup menu that is opened by right clicking on the mouse at the load module in the workspace The user program is downloaded to the RAM or flash memory This function also downloads information required for source level debugging such as debugging information 3 Memory data uploading function The specified amount of memory from the specified address can be saved in the file 4 Memory data downloading function The memory contents saved in a file can be downloaded Select Load from the popup menu in the Memory window 5 Displaying the variable contents The variable contents specified in the user program are displayed For the usage of the function for displaying the variable contents refer to section 5 12 Looking at Variables 6 Other memory operation functions Other functions are as follows e Memory fill e Memory copy e Memory save e Memory verify e Memory search 176 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Internal I O display e Displaying label and variable names and their contents Notes 1 Memory access during user program execution When memory is accessed from the memory window etc during execution of the user program execution stops for the memory access and is then resumed Therefore realtime emulation cannot be performed 2 Memory access during user program break The program can also be downloaded and t
122. Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the edit fields the margins required set the inch or mm radio buttons to set the measurements 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect rage setup Margins Let Right o Top p Bottom pooo Inch C mm Header Footer gt JV Wrap Text Cancel Figure 4 6 Page Setup Dialog gt To set up the page header and footers 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the header and footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect gt To set up print wrapping 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 75 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Click the wrap text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything is visible 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 8 2 Changing Tabs gt To change tab size 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Enter into the
123. Project option Note You can load or unload plural projects at a time That is more efficient to load or unload a project individually 36 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project to the workspace you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a project above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of the HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original project path The older version of the HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a subdirectory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop gt To change a projects relative path flag 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select properties 3 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch on or off the relative file path feature figure 2 25 4
124. STOP sign is grayed out Press the Esc key click on the Stop toolbar button or choose Debug gt Halt Program When the program has been stopped by Stop Stop is displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window 5 10 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches a specific point or points in your code You can do this by setting a PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which you want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint operation is required use the Event window which can be opened by clicking the d button or choosing View gt Code gt Eventpoints For details refer to section 5 13 Using the Event Points e To set a PC breakpoint in the Source window 1 Make sure that the Disassembly or Source window is open at the place you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Choose Toggle Breakpoint from the popup menu or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop 3 You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 The current breakpoint set can be enabled or disabled by using Enable Disable Breakpoint in the popup menu Now when you run your program and it reaches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution ha
125. Select Function Select Function Name Set Function Name Sample sort long Sample sort long short Sa Counter All Function Select Function Set Function 2 Functions 2 Functions fo Functions i Cancel Figure 5 36 Select Function Dialog Box Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally one function can be selected at one time only for setting breakpoints multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Counter All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box Selecting a Function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button 274 2 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Deselecting a Function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box
126. Set the associated check boxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click OK to confirm the new project dependencies Dependent Projects 2 x main_project hed Cancel Dependent projects Mdepend01 Figure 2 24 Dependent Projects dialog 35 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace gt To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Remove Project option or 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Press the DEL key 3 Dialog box is displayed You confirm to remove the project In the Options dialog box of the Tools menu you can select this confirmation is performed or not Note You cannot remove the current project from the workspace 2 13 Loading unloading a Project into from a Workspace gt To load a project into a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Load Project option gt To unload a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Unload
127. TheShark CFish myFishyFood int FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood int FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonFood int FeedTheShark char pszOtherType Figure 14 3 Smart edit function selection Note Smart edit auto completion may not pop up for a variety of reasons HEW can only provide help when the file has been scanned by the navigation component For this to work the file must have been saved Another issue is that defines are not considered so this means that redundant areas of code may still be visible Another important consideration is if the syntax of your code is incorrect the smart editor may not be able to parse your code correctly and the smart edit functionality will fail In this case no pop up will be displayed 163 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Please note that Smart edit does not support macro usage 164 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Debugger Part 7tENESAS 165 166 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section Overview The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW is a Graphical User Interface intended to ease the development and debugging of applications written in C C programming language and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Its aim is to provide a powerful yet intuitive way of accessing observing and modifying the debugging platform in
128. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
129. User s Manual 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Code Select a source file name in the Workspace window and click Open in the popup menu to make the HEW display the source file in the editor Itis also possible to display your source files by double clicking on their names in the Workspace window amp tutor ial cpp 0x00001024 a mainfvoid long a 10 long j int is class Sample p_sam 000001036 while Cf 0x00001034 p_sam new Sample 000001038 for i 0 i lt 10 i 0x00001044 j rand 0x00001048 ifG lt of 000001050 ea Ox00001058 ali j 0x00001068 p_sam gt sort a 0x00001070 p_sam gt change a 0x00001076 p_sam gt s0 aLl0 Ox0000107a p_sam gt sl aL1 nenannniand a wae NAIM FO 1 Figure 5 2 Source Window 235 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual In this window the following items are shown on the left as line information The first column Source address column Address information The second column Event column Event information break condition The third column Editor column PC bookmark and breakpoint information Source address column When a program is downloaded an address for the current source file is displayed on the Source address column These addresses are helpful when setting the PC value or a breakpoint Event column The Event column displays the following item An address condition as a break condition only one such a position
130. When a break condition is disabled the break condition will remain in the list but an event will not occur when the specified conditions have been satisfied 292 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 25 Deleting Break Conditions Select a break condition and choose Delete from the popup menu to remove the selected break condition To retain the break condition but not have it cause an event when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 5 13 24 Disabling Break Conditions 5 13 26 Deleting All Break Conditions Choose Delete All from the popup menu to remove all break conditions 5 13 27 Viewing the Source Line for Break Conditions Select a break condition and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to open the Source or Disassembly window at the address of the break condition The Go to Source menu is only available when one break condition that has the corresponding source file is selected 5 13 28 Break condition 1 Dialog Box Break condition 1 condition Address Don t care Address Only program fetched address after Address H o0000000 Mask Non user mask Fz Data Don t care Value H o0000000 Low byte C High byte Word Read Write Read Write C Read C White Figure 5 50 Break condition 1 Dialog Box 293 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Note The items that can be set in this dialog box differ depending on
131. a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Output window during a build build all or build file operation via the Tools Options dialog gt To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab figure 2 19 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool is executed Options xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Errors and warnings 0 I Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds 0 r Show I Command line I Environment J Initial directory Figure 2 19 Options Dialog Build Tab 2 7 File Dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies between files for example one C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a 30 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual project are checked for dependencies Once co
132. ace Projects Workspace Name ftest Project Name ftest Directory o Hew test Browse CPU family H8S H8 300 Tool chain None A Debugger only H Properties Figure 4 17 New Project Workspace Dialog Box 215 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual b Select the target MCU and click the Next button New Project Step 7 x E10T SYSTEM Target type HIBEEGs Finish Cancel Figure 4 18 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box 216 2tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual c The Select Emulator mode dialog box is displayed Select Emulator mode Device HBS xxxx x Mode Download emulator firmware C Does not download emulator firmware C Writing Flash memory Cancel Figure 4 19 Select Emulator mode Dialog Box Select the Writing Flash memory mode d Turn on the target board and press the OK button N Power on the target board and press lt Enter gt Key Figure 4 20 Dialog Box of the Power on Request Message 217 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Input the system clock value System Clock Please input System Clock m MHz Cancel Figure 4 21 System Clock Dialog Box Select Debug Setting from the Option menu Koi Write_only High performance Embedded Workshop File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Windo
133. ace 1 1 Remove Figure 6 4 Customize Dialog Menu Tab 2 Click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 6 5 will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing system tools radio button choose the tool from the drop down list and then click OK Alternatively if you would like to add a tool of your own then follow the remaining steps 3 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field 4 Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field 5 Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field 6 Enter an initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial directory field 7 Click OK to add the menu option to the Tools menu 104 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add Tool 2 xi Define new user tool OK Tool details Cancel Name E xplorer Command StWINDIF explorer exe gt Browse Arguments 2 Initial directory STEMPDIR gt Browse C Select from existing system tools Figure 6 5 Add Tool Dialog New menu options are added to the bottom of the list i e bottom of the tools menu by default The order of menu options in the Tools menu can also be modified gt To modify a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog sh
134. al a Workspace Ioj Xx ia Demo amp sbrk _CLOSEALL amp _INIT_IOLIB change J close amp Dummy INT_Illegal_code amp lseek amp main J Manual_Reset_PC M GE Projects 4 Templates lt Navigation Figure 1 14 Workspace Window Navigation Tab To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed If Allow Docking is checked docking is allowed otherwise docking is not allowed Select Allow Docking to check or uncheck it When Allow Docking is checked you can dock a window a toolbar or a menu bar to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window Also if Allow Docking is checked you can float them above the other HEW windows or outside the HEW main window Figure 1 15 i shows a docked Workspace window and figure 1 15 ii shows a floating Workspace window Workspace ioj x 8 ey Demo sgum B Assembly source file 2 lowlvLsre 5 8 C source file 2 dbsct c Demo c intprg c lowsre c E resetprg c 2 sbrk c 2 vecttbl c 3 Dependencies i I Assembly source file lowlvl sre C source file E dbsct c Demo c E intprg c lowsrc c resetprg c sbrk c ea 4 vecttblc X Figure 1 15
135. alog Box Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform View window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 16bit 307 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays the Y axis for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected 308 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 6 Tutorial 6 1 Introduction This section describes the main functions of the emulator by using a tutorial program The tutorial program is based on the C program that sorts ten random data items in ascending or descending order The tutorial program performs the following actions e The main function generates random data to be sorted e The sort function sorts the generated random data in ascending order e The change function then sorts the data in descending order The file tutorial cpp contains source code for the tutorial program The file Tutorial abs is a compiled load module in the Dwarf2 format Note After recompilation the addresses may differ from those given in this section 6 2 Running the HEW To run the HEW refer to section 3 5 System Check in the Debugger Part 6 3 Setting up the Emulator This section describes the basic settings of the emulator 309 7tENESAS High pe
136. ame Class Member functions Protected member variable Private member variable Global variables and functions folder Figure 13 4 C Navigation information The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are listed in the table below RENESAS 157 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Public member function Private member function Protected member function Bi Private member variable EAJ Protected member variable Public member variable Figure 13 5 C Navigation Icons The navigator view allows you to move around your source code quickly and efficiently Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items definition Normally the definition is found in the source file and the declaration is found in the header file This default behavior can be modified for this action This can be achieved via the configure view dialog The configure view dialog modifies the way data in the navigation view is displayed gt To configure the C navigation views data 1 Right click on a C navigation item in the navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure 13 2 is shown 2 Select the Configure view menu item The dialog in figure 13 5 is displayed Decide what items you wish to modify and click OK to accept the changes Configure iew I x JV Jump to defini
137. and changes are logged to this file This dialog is shown in figure 6 16 When the workspace log is clicked any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same name as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the generate log for projects log is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file is updated when the workspace is saved Figure 6 16 Tools customize log tab 114 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to a version control tool Some of the reasons why version control tools are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by controlling revisions to its source files Figure 7 1 illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files NETWORK
138. any case the principles are the same each step or phase of the build takes a set of project files and then builds them if all succeeds then the next step or phase is executed suo Bal COMPILER Cc Source Files ASSEMBLER Assembler Source Files Project LINKER PEET B Files Library Files Load Module Figure 2 1 Typical Build Process In the example shown in figure 2 1 the compiler is the first phase the assembler is the second phase and the linker is the third and final phase During the compiler phase the C source files from the project are compiled in turn during the assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the linker phase all library files and output files from the compiler and assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module This module can then be downloaded and used by the debugger functionality in HEW The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phase disable a phase delete phases and so forth These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features In this chapter only the general principles and basic features will be detailed 13 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 Project Files In order for the HEW to be able to build yo
139. as the file 4 Set the Executable return code options as described in the following section 5 Click OK to define the new command 8 2 1 Executable return code If the return code of the command s can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is option and set the two fields to the right as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the HEW will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If so no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each Consequently all commands will execute regardless 125 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 Specifying Arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button refer to appendix C Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a
140. at the current directory alteration is not affected Example FILE_LOAD C HEW Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E 10T Tutorial Debug_Tiny_SLP_E10T_SYSTEM Tutorial abs Memory Save During User Program Execution Do not execute memory save or verifying during user program execution Load of Motorola S type Files This HEW does not support Motorola S type files with only the CR code H 0D at the end of each record Load Motorola S type files with the CR and LF codes H 0DOA at the end of each record I O window Display and modification Do not change values in the I O Registers window because the emulator uses the address break controller Note that the E10T emulator does not support the display of the invalid module or bit information in the I O window 370 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 10 Note on Register Window Operation During Program Execution The register value cannot be changed in the Register window during program execution Even if the changed value is displayed the register contents are not changed actually 11 Break Functions 1 1 1 1 2 Ww 4 Nn When the PC breakpoint is set in the flash memory area the program is written to the flash memory each time the user program is executed At this time note that the number of rewritable times will be decreased BREAKPOINT cancellation When the contents of the BREAKPOINT address i
141. ating a new extension you should consider whether the extension belongs to a group which is already defined or whether you need to create a new file group If you are adding a completely new type of file then you will want to create a new file group This process is described below To create a new file extension in a new file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 9 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to a new group option and enter a description which defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open with drop list These are listed below e Editor e None Other e Windows default If the editor is selected the open file function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If none is selected then the open operation is disabled when the open file function is attempted Selecting Other allows you
142. ations are available e Add a file to version control e Remove a file from version control e Geta read only copy of a file or files e Check out a read write copy of a file or files i e for editing e Check in a previously checked out file or files i e update Visual SourceSafe with the edits made e Undo a previously check out operation on a file or files i e cancel any edits made e View the status of a file e View the history of a file These commands can only be accessed via the Tools gt Version Control sub menu whereas all of the other commands can be accessed from both the toolbar and menu 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them gt To remove a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Remove Files toolbar button ids or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Remove Files menu option 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file gt To get a r
143. aunch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 112 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 8 Using Custom Placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders this means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open Customize 21x Toolbars Commands Me
144. b Select the Information tab to view any information about the component figure 5 5 This may include copyright information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties 24 x General Information Environment Information High performance Embedded Workshop H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Ver 5 0 2 0 H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator Ver 1 0 02 H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Ver 4 0 04 Figure 5 5 Properties Dialog Information Tab 93 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings figure 5 6 This dialog is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties General Information Environment Environment variables CH38 C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 include Add CH38TMP C TEMP a PATH C Hew Tools HitachiSH8 5_0_2 bin i Remove Figure 5 6 Properties Dialog Environment Tab To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 5 7 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment tab Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the
145. bar button amp or press CTRL F7 or click the right mouse button on a file icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build lt file gt from the pop up menu 28 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 3 Stopping a Build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process gt To stop a build 1 Select Build gt Stop Build or click the stop build toolbar button amp The build will be stop after the current file has been built 2 Wait until the message Build Finished appears in the Output window before continuing gt To forcibly terminate a current tool 1 Select Build gt Terminate Current Tool The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build multiple projects and configurations at once gt To build multiple projects 1 Select Build gt Build Multiple The figure displayed in figure 2 18 2 The build multiple gives you the choice of which projects and configurations should be built To select which projects and configurations need to be built select the check box next to the project configuration combination you want to build For example in figure 2 1
146. be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if another project uses one of the others in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library that is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent i e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project gt To make projects depend upon another 1 Select Project gt Dependent Projects The Dependent Projects dialog will be displayed figure 2 24 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents to When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent projects list has a check box for each project listed
147. build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended Kaa BEGIN al COMPILE lt e ASSEMBLE e LINK lt 0 Figure 3 5 Typical Build Process The build phase dialog provides facilities for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order 46 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 1 Build Phase Order The Build Order tab figure 3 6 displays the current order in which phases will be executed when the build or build all 4 operation is selected The check box to the left of each phase indicates whether or not it is currently enabled By clicking this box the phase can be toggled on or off Build Phases x Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order rE VJH85 H8 300 C C Library Generator Add H8S H8 300 C C Compiler VIH8S H8 300 Assembler Moapa OptLinker aan V MyPhase TOEA i Move lp Move Down 4 gt Import Cancel i Figure 3 6 Build Phases Dialog Build Order Tab In addition the following operations can be performed gt To remove a phase 1 Select the phase that you wou
148. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
149. by default Emu System lator Opens the Configuration Properties dialog box allowing the user to modify the debugging platform settings Debug Reset CPU D E Resets the target hardware and sets the PC to the reset vector address Go F5 an F Starts executing the user program at the current PC Reset Go 364 Shift F5 wt 7 ENESAS Resets the target microcomputer and executes the user program from the reset vector address High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table G 1 Window Functions cont Menu Debug cont Option Go To Cursor Shortcut Toolbar Button Remarks Starts executing the user program at the current PC until the PC reaches the address indicated by the current text cursor position Set PC To Cursor Sets the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Run Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter the PC or PC breakpoint during executing the user program Step In F11 Executes a block of user program before breaking Step Over F10 Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Shift F11 Step Out Executes the user program to reach the end of the current function Step Launches the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping
150. can be set This is also set by using the popup menu The bitmap symbol above is shown by double clicking the Event column This is also set by using the popup menu Figure 5 3 Popup Menu Notes 1 The contents of the Event column are erased when conditions other than the address condition are added to each channel by using the Edit menu or in the Eventpoint window 2 The conditions for setting the break condition differ depending on the device For details refer to the online help Editor column Editor column displays the following items I A bookmark is set A PC Break is set PC location 236 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To switch off a column in all source files Click the right hand mouse button on the Source window Click the Define Column Format or Edit menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog box is displayed A check box indicates whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked the column is enabled If the check box is gray the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others Deselect the check box of a column you want to switch off 5 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect WN eR Global Editor Column States Event Editor Source Address Cancel Figure 5 4 Global Editor Column States Dialog Box gt To switch off a column in one source file 1 Open the so
151. cations Temperature Operating 10 C to 35 C Storage 10 C to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 RH to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 RH to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max Ambient gases No corrosive gases may be present Table 1 2 lists the acceptable operating environments Table 1 2 Operating Environments Item Host computer Description Built in Pentium III or higher performance CPU 600 MHz or higher recommended IBM PC or compatible machine with the PCMCIA TYPE II slot or the PCI slot OS Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP Minimum memory capacity 128 Mbytes or more double of the load module size recommended Hard disk capacity Installation disk capacity 100 Mbytes or more Prepare an area at least double the memory capacity four times or more recommended as the swap area Pointing device such as mouse Connectable to the host computer compatible with Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP Power voltage 5 0 0 25 V Current consumption 100 mA max CD drive Required to install the software for the emulator or refer to the emulator user s manual 171 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 3 Components Check all the components unpacking For details on the E1
152. ce cece eeeesse cece caeeeeecaeecaeeeaeeaeecaeeeaeeaeesaeeenes 292 5 13 23 Enabling Break Conditions ceeceeceecesecssecseceecssecaecaecaecaecaeecaesaesaeeeaeenaes 292 5 13 24 Disabling Break Conditions eee ceceesceeeeesecssecsaecaecseecaecaeceesaeeeseeeneeegs 292 5 13 25 Deleting Break Conditions s ccscses sctisessssscaecdneneiects setdseesnsiveisstuesessehessbeaersetasbe 293 5 13 26 Deleting All Break Conditions cece cee cee ceecsecseecaeesaecaecaeesaesseeraeesaeenaes 293 5 13 27 Viewing the Source Line for Break Conditions 00 00 eee eeeeeeeeeseeereeneeeneeeees 293 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 28 Break condition 1 Dialog BOX ceeceeeseseceecseeceeeceneeeeneeeeeeecsaeceeeecnaeeeeneenaes 293 5 14 Viewing the Trace Information eee ceeeceeeceeeceeceseceaecsaecaecaeecaeeeaeseeeveeeeeeseaeengs 296 5 14 1 Opening the Trace Window 000 eee eceecceecesscesecesecesecaecaeecaeeeaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeenes 296 5 14 2 Acquiring Trace Information ee eeceeceeeceseceaeceaecseecseeceesaeseaeseneeeeeeaeenes 296 5 14 3 Clearing the Trace Information ceecesecesecesecsseceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 297 5 14 4 Saving the Trace Information in a File ee eee eee cse cece cneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenes 297 5 14 5 Viewing the Source Window ccceeccessseseeeecseceeeeceeeesaeeeeeeessaeceerecsaeeneneenaes 297 5 14 6 Trimming the Source eee cece csseeeecesecesecesecscesecaecsaecsecaecsaecaesaeesaeenaes
153. cedure e Click the left of displayed array a in the Source window to position the cursor e Select Instant Watch with the right hand mouse button The following dialog box will be displayed Instant Watch a Oxffde one fO Figure 6 15 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add button to add a variable to the Watch window w Watch one 10 Figure 6 16 Watch Window Displaying the Array 323 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The user can also add a variable to the Watch window by specifying its name e Click the Watch window with the right hand mouse button and select Add Watch from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed Enter variable i Add Watch Variable or expression Figure 6 17 Add Watch Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Watch window will now also show the int type variable i a Watch lone f0 H 000a Oxff48 Figure 6 18 Watch Window Displaying the Variable 324 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The user can click mark at the left side of array a in the Watch window to watch all the elements wt Watch C lone 10 H 000041c6 Oxtfde H 0000167e Oxtf52 H 00002781 Oxff56 H 0000446b OxtfSa H 0000794b Oxtf5e H 000015tb Oxtf62 H 000059e2 Oxtf 6 H 00001ctb Oxff
154. ceeteseenaeesaes 121 8 1 2 User menu options eee eeceecesecssecssecseesseceseceecaeeeseseeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeseseseesaeenaes 123 Defining Version Control Commands 0 eee eeeeseeeeesseeseessecesceseceaeceaecaeceeceeeeeeneeees 125 8 2 1 Executable return code eee eiren E R EE E S 125 Specifying Ar PUIMEMtS seson ree Ee a S aE Ee ETER E S ENES 126 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations essesssseeesseesesreeresrerrererrreresrenresrerrsrenrnsenrreeerreeresre 127 8 3 2 Specifying Environment cceccceesoesenssenssensessessnseesesncessenssesssesseesecensereees 130 8 3 3 Specifying CommMentts 20s sescccs secssceteecesevestnescvetbecsovs cous iieo sennoina ineine 131 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password eesessesseseerssreresreerrsrerrsrerresrerrererrreresre 132 Controlling Execution ssiri irsseseiciscsisereesopsereiteisie ceb se sae oideis eer E o ERE EI eE GE E EEan 134 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command ss esssreesssisrierrsrreresrerrnsrerrsrnrtssrerrererrrerese 134 84 2 Rumin DOS Window ee ee eean E EE E A E E 134 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter 0 eee 134 Importing and exporting a Set Up eee cee cee cseeceesaecacecaeesaecaaecaeesaesseecaeeaeeeeeaees 134 Using Visual SS OUNCES ANC sissies tinetesan eiiis eie 137 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace sssesseeeeseerseeeresrressstrrrsserresrerreserrreresrees 137 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe
155. ch for a suitable driver for my device recommended radio button and then the Specify a location check box to select the path to be searched for drivers The location must be specified according to the emulator type as listed below When using the PCI card emulator lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCI 2000 When using the PCMCIA card emulator lt Drive gt DRIVERS PCMCIA 2000 lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive letter 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 Connecting the Emulator to the Host Computer Insert the card emulator into the PCMCIA TYPE II slot or the PCI slot of the host computer Notes 1 When Add New Hardware Wizard is displayed select the Search for the best driver for your device Recommended radio button and then the Specify a location check box to select the path to be searched for drivers The location must be specified as lt Drive gt DRIVERS lt Drive gt is the CD drive letter 2 Be sure to install the software for the emulator before putting the emulator in place WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator product and the user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES except for the PCI or PCMCIA interface cable Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 183 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3
156. clude Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the selected file Then the file is excluded from build To include the file in build again push the right button of your mouse on the file and select Include Build lt file gt 347 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 I opened a workspace from my PC and one of my colleagues opened the same workspace simultaneously from another PC I changed the settings of the workspace and saved it My colleague saved the workspace after me I opened the workspace again and found that the settings of the workspace differed from those I had made The last settings to be saved are effective While a workspace is open in the HEW updating of the workspace is within the memory The settings are not saved in a file unless the user intentionally saves the workspace 7 Iwant HEW to automatically specify default options to a file which is newly added to a project You can specify default options to a phase if the phase is a multiple build phase Select a phase from the Options menu If the phase is a multiple build phase a file list is displayed on the left hand side of the options dialog figure B 1 In the file list open a folder of a file group to which you want to specify your default options You will find a Default Options icon in the folder Select the icon specify options on the right hand side of the options dialog and click OK The options specified here will
157. component with HEW it must first be registered The Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select Tools gt Administration If you attempt to access tools administration when there is a workspace open the tools administration dialog is opened but cannot be modified When HEW is installed by default any new tools are automatically registered HEW stores tool information in a tool database file By default this is created in the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location gt To change the tools location 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click the Modify button for the Current HEW tools database location field 3 Select the directory under which the new tool is located then click OK 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location this is achieved by using the scan disk or register tool functionality 90 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 Registering Components The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register com
158. ct These are described below e Clicking right button on an open file in the editor window displays a pop up menu option figure 2 4 If the file is already in the project then the Add File to Project menu option is disabled Selecting the Add File to Project then adds the file to the current project Build File dbsct c Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctr Add File fic Project Eind Ctri F Find In Files F4 Replace Ctrl H Goto Line CtritG Match Braces Ctri M Book marks gt Templates Toggle Breakpoint F9 Enable Disable Bre Figure 2 4 Editor Window Pop up Menu 15 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e In the HEW it is also possible to Drag and Drop files from Windows Explorer onto the workspace window These files will be automatically added to the project and are displayed in the folder in which they were dragged to Note If you add a file to a project when it is an unrecognized file type then it will still be added to the project Certain functions will be disabled with reference to this file When this file is double clicked in the workspace window instead of opening the file in the editor the open operation is passed to Windows operating system The default open operation is then carried out as if the file was opened in Windows Explorer To view the current defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog see the section
159. ct inside a Visual SourceSafe database It allows you to quickly invoke the standard commands either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system To use Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed figure 7 3 which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version Control Systems list and click the Select button 3 Click OK to confirm the selection The SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed figure 9 1 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe login into Username and password into Password 5 Enter into Database path the full path to the Visual SourceSafe database i e SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this project 6 Click OK The Create SourceSafe Project dialog is invoked figure 9 2 7 The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field sho
160. cted address range gt Setting section group When using the overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate incorrectly First click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups Address Section Name OOFFB800 OOFFB8DB Figure 5 39 Overlay Dialog Box Highest Priority Section Group Selected 276 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 277 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 12 Looking at Variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 5 12 1 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch feature gt To use Tooltip Watch
161. ctivated the command chain can be automatically executed It is also possible to register multiple load modules to be downloaded The registered load modules are displayed on the workspace window 1 Select Debug Settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box Debug Settings SessionH8_xxxx_F1 OT_SYSTEN Target Options Tutorial Target Default Debug Format Elt Dwarf2 Download Modules Offset Address Forme ICONFIGDIR S H 00000000 Elf D Figure 4 14 Debug Settings Dialog Box Target Page 2 Select the product name to be connected in the Target drop down list box 3 Select the format of the load module to be downloaded in the Default Debug Format drop down list box then register the corresponding download module in the Download Modules list box 4 Click the Options tab 212 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Debug Settings SessionH8_xxxx_E1 OT_SYSTEN x Target Options es Tutorial Command batch file load timing At target connection Command Line Batch Processing Vy onnect up to target a M Download modules after build Cancel Figure 4 15 Debug Settings Dialog Box Options Page The command chain that is automatically executed at the specified timing is registered The following three timings can be specified e At connecting the emulator e Immediately before downloading e Immediately after download
162. cture then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them Expansion indicator C O E Oxtfde lone 10 H0000698F Oxffde lone H 000037db Oxff52 lone H00003714 Oxff56 lone H 000031f4 Oxff5a lone H 0000295a Oxff5e lone Expanded watch H 00002525 Oxff62 lone H00001e91 Oxff 6 lone H 00001586 Oxff ia lone H 00000420 Oxff6e lone Collapsed watch H 0000031a Oxff 2 lone Oxff4e lone iO Figure 5 44 Expanding a Watch Item To collapse an expanded watch item double click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign The watch item can be expanded for the number of levels when a numerical key from 1 to 9 is pressed while a watch item is selected 282 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Editing a Watch Item s Value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a
163. d If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless 51 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Options Output Files Dependent Files Output files ICONFIGDIF utilities lib Add Modify Remove didi Cancel Figure 3 12 Custom Options Output Files Tab gt To add an output file 1 Click Add The Add Output File dialog will be invoked figure 3 13 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu 2x Eile gt Browse Cancel Figure 3 13 Add Output File Dialog gt To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Output File dialog which is the same as figure 3 13 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 52 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tab The Dependent Files tab figure 3 14 is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Bef
164. d all of the files will be extracted from the selected items and passed in turn to the version control command For example if you select the workspace icon then all of the files in all of the projects will be passed in turn to the version control command This will include any system files For example if you select the project item then 2 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the most flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed figure 8 1 119 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Version Control Setup Status of Filefs Figure 8 1 Version Control Setup Dialog Commands Tab 120 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Commands tab contains two lists of menu options The first list System menu options and toolbar buttons represents those menu options which always appear on the version control sub menu These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the version control toolbar The second list User menu options represents those additional user defined options which are added to the bottom of the version control sub menu Figure 8 2 shows the s
165. d in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the HEW 2 If any of the components have problems these can be seen in the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then the icon in figure 5 12 is used to show this If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure 5 13 is used to show this 97 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Registered components Component oS TAR TINY SERIES H8 300HN l s a Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Stand Hise CiimerH AICI same Chand Figure 5 12 Incompatible component found icon H8S H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform HMon Embedded Monitor Platform Intel Hex Record Obiect Reader 3 0 1 0 1 0 98 Figure 5 13 Component not found icon RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 On Demand components The HEW version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process gt To load or unload an on demand component manually 1 Click the Project
166. debugging information is loaded the labels are registered at that time It is also possible to add labels The Disassembly window shows the first eight characters of each label instead of the corresponding address or as a part of an instruction operand Note When a label value matches an operand the corresponding instruction operand is replaced by the label If two or more labels have the same value the one that comes first in alphabetical order is displayed 5 8 1 Listing Labels Choose View gt Symbol gt Labels or click the View Labels toolbar button to list all labels defined in the current debug session Label H 00000400 PowerON Re H 00001000 H 00000103E _main H 00000104C tutoriali H 00001182 _abort H 0000118C __INITSCT H 00001140 loopl H 00001146 loop H 00001148 next_loopZ H oo0011aC next_loopl H oooo011BA loop3 H 000011C2 loop4 H o000011C8 next_loop4 H oooolice next_loop3 H oooollpa operator newlunsigned int H o00001224 __ CALL INIT H 00001244 __CALL_ END H o00001248 operator delete void H 00001252 _rand H 00001286 _srand H 00001290 DIVL 3 H 00001294 not_negX H 000OLZAZ not_negY H O00OLZAC not_negZ uUinnnni7o Mae manent Figure 5 26 Label Window You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading 260 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Double clicking o
167. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
168. down list box 4 Select the destination phase i e which phase takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list box 5 Click OK to create the new mapping Define File Mapping ai x File group Object file z Cancel Source phase Destination phase as Figure 3 17 Define File Mapping Dialog gt To modify a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be modified 2 Click Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 3 Modify the options as necessary 4 Click OK to commit the changes 56 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 6 Controlling the Build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog figure 3 18 Options 21x Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Errors and warnings I Stop build if the number of errors exceeds 0 MV Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds 10 r Show I Command line Environment Tl Initial directory Figure 3 18 Options Dialog Build Tab Select Tools gt Options to invoke the dialog If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of errors
169. e window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 299 ztENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 16 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image The memory contents can be displayed as an image in the Image window 5 16 1 Opening the Image Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Image or click the Image toolbar button m to open the Image Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 54 Image Properties m Color Information Mod Bit Pivel 8bit Index Color C RGB C BGR YCbCr Format chunky v m Buffer Infomation Data Address JH 00000000 bi Palette Address m Width Height Size Pixel wi ro Buffer Size Width H 00000000 Byte Height o Yv Sampling E44 m View Information View Mode Position Full Size x Position i C Part Size Y Position i m Start Position Width Height Size Pivel Top C Bottom Figure 5 54 Image Properties Dialog Box 300 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image window The following items are to be specified Color Information Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed MONOCHROME Black a
170. e you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 2 The Main Window The HEW main window appears as shown in figure 1 2 3 Demo_H8S2600A High Performance Embedded Workshop Demo_H8S2600A c lt i gt File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help laj x Deua ekeela erna a a E oaaae Eoas Te sinsessontes 2600 ell Fy lal Dl a SS E ERER AAA gars e e eal joie aaa xix void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int B g Demo_H8526004 8 ie Demo_H8S2600A Ey Assembly source J lowlvi ste oa C source fle Ox00000800 long a 10 dbsct c void main void DE 2 lowsre c long a 10 min max long j resetpra c sens A s E sbike 0x0000080a int i Download modu 0x00000812 srand 1 D Demo_H8S Dependencies 0x00000822 printf Data Input n piers 0x0000082a ere 0x00000836 for i 0 i
171. e Groups entry in the input file group list Selecting this list entry displays the dialog in figure 3 3c Select Groups _JAssembly source file Binary file C header file Cancel C list file C source file C header file C list file C source file CPU information file Expanded assembly source file lt LI OSU Figure 3 3c Modify multiple input file groups Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file groups name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog 43 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The third step figure 3 3d requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run from i e where you want the current working directory to be
172. e current file 1 2 3 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search Select Edit gt Find press CTRL F select Find from the editor window s local menu or click the find toolbar button The Find dialog box will be displayed figure 4 2 Find what sting E Find Next I Match whole word only Direction Cancel I Match case C Up T Regular expression 9 Figure 4 2 Find Dialog Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to Appendix B Regular Expressions for further information The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search
173. e directory Temp directory Temporary directory Command directory Version control executable directory Windows directory Directory where Windows is installed Windows system directory Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name Current workspace name Project name Current project name Configuration name Current configuration name 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever get the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings The latter tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map to which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 7 127 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Yersion Control Setup 2 xi Commands Projects General Show details for project Project b Details Version co
174. e next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 5 8 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label Select a label and choose View Source from the popup menu to open the Source or Disassembly window containing the address corresponding to the label 264 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 Executing Your Program This section describes how you can execute your program s code In this section run your program continuously or step single or multiple instructions at a time 5 9 1 Running from Reset To reset the target MCU and run your program from the reset vector address choose Debug gt Reset Go or click the Go Reset toolbar button The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually by pressing the Esc key choosing Debug gt Halt or by clicking the Halt toolbar button Note The program will start running from the address that is stored in the reset vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 5 9 2 Continuing Run When your program is stopped the HEW will display an yellow arrow mark in the gutter of the line in the Source and Disassembly window that correspond to the CPU s current program counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue
175. e sampling value 5 17 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 5 17 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 5 17 4 Zoom In Display Selecting Zoom In from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 5 17 5 Zoom Out Display Selecting Zoom Out from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis reduced 306 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 17 6 Resetting the Zoom Display Selecting Reset Zoom from the popup menu displays the waveforms in its original size 5 17 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the popup menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 5 17 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale In the Scale submenu of the popup menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 5 17 9 Non Display of Cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the popup menu hides the cursor display 5 17 10 Displaying the Sampling Information Selecting Sample Information from the popup menu displays the Sample Information dialog box Sample Information Data Size Sbit Channel Mono X H o0000077 We H 00 Value Figure 5 59 Sample Information Di
176. e set only to the flash memory or RAM area However a software break cannot be set to the following addresses An area other than the flash memory or RAM An area occupied by the E10T emulator program An instruction in which Break Condition 1 is satisfied 3 During step execution a software breakpoint is disabled 4 A condition set at Break Condition 1 is disabled immediately after starting execution when an instruction at a software breakpoint is executed A break does not occur even if a condition of Break Condition 1 is satisfied immediately after starting the execution 5 When execution resumes from the breakpoint address after the program execution stops at the software breakpoint single step execution is performed at the address before execution resumes Therefore realtime operation cannot be performed 6 Settings of software breakpoint and Break Condition 1 are invalid while the STEP OVER function is being used 5 13 13 Setting Break Conditions On the Breakcondition sheet the settings for break conditions are displayed modified and added Eventpoint Action Break conditiDisable None 4 A gt N Breakpoint A _Breakcondition Figure 5 49 Eventpoint Window Breakcondition Sheet Note The items that can be set in this window differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help This window displays and sets the break condition 290 7 ENESAS
177. e src FILEDIR c new workspace project FILENAME file src FILELEAF file EXTENSION src WORKSPDIR c new workspace WORKSPNAME workspace PROUDIR c new workspace project PROJECTNAME project CONFIGDIR c new workspace project debug CONFIGNAME debug HEWDIR c hew TCINSTALL c new toolchains renesas h8 51 1 TOOLDIR c new toolchains renesas h8 51 1 TEMPDIR c Temp WINDIR c Windows WINSYSDIR c Windows System EXEDIR v ve win32 USERNAME JHARK PASSWORD 214436 VCDIR c project is mapped to x vc project COMMENT Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked LINE 12 In table D 2 we are assuming that e a file path is c hew workspace project file src e a workspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace e aproject named project is located at c hew workspace project e aconfiguration named debug has a configuration directory located at c hew workspace project debug e HEW EXE is installed in c hew 354 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located in c hew toolchain renesas h8 5 11 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the option setting dialogs of the Options menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration
178. ead only copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Get Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get Files menu option 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user does not already check out the file or files in question gt To check out a writable copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check Out Files toolbar button S or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check Out Files menu option 139 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 When the operation is finished the file has a red tick next to its name This means you as the current user of HEW has checked it out 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures
179. eaeeenes 254 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Contents cece ceeecesecesecseecaecaecaeecneeeseseeeeeneeaes 255 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File eee eeeescesecsecssecseecaeenaeseeraeesaeeeaeeaes 256 Viewing the I O Memory 0 cee ceecseeseeeeeeeeeeseceseceseceseesscseesecsaecsaecnaecaaecaaeeneseneesaseaes 257 5 6 1 Opening the TO Window sissies neiseis aea eiee niee 257 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display eee ee ceeceseceseesecesecesecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaes 258 5 6 3 Manually Loading an W O File ee eee eeeceseceseceaecsaecseecaeecaeesaerseesaeeeaeeneeeaes 258 5 6 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents eee cesecssecseeceeeaecaeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 258 5 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents 0 0000 ee eee cee ceeesee eee teeeteeeeeeeaeeenes 258 Viewing the Current Status eee cseceeeeeeeeeeeceeecesecesecaecsaecsaecaeecaecsaessaesaeeeaeeeneeags 259 Looking at Labels 2 ussoca scevsenssevsecdivesshassns donseenecdvesetasescetetite sed soteatevedeeideusetendensbdetgoressstebes 260 38A Listine labels arenan aid igae ks asc sea ans eases E 260 5 8 2 Adding a Label ysccccesssc socestetscsesevsesdevsesessdueseedesdsaecyepeveessevssgestentocessistuaeviesteeeys 261 5 8 3 Editmg a Label wi vsci lt iussecues sod cguvobasssnedveccueyscevureesdausensscc idesusvanstensstebcoiseteeavedes 261 384 Deleting a Label srecne oa ia es 262 58 5 Deleting AM Labels irona ae R ea eE Ei a 262 5 8 6 Loading Labels from a
180. echnology Corp or a third party Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp by various means including the Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor home page http Mwww renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the appl
181. ected you will notice that the Version Control gt Configure option has now become available The next chapter discusses the usage of the custom version control system 117 RENESAS 118 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system is a configurable addition to the High performance Embedded Workshop which allows you to connect to a version control system already installed on your machine To clarify further the High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide a version control tool itself only a means by which you can integrate the version control system which you use into your workspaces and projects 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options The custom version control system allows you to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window gt To execute a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select whichever items you would like to apply the version control command to from the Workspace window This may include a workspace project s folder s and file s When the command is selecte
182. ective manuals Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Table 1 Typographic Conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option Bold text with gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key 5 When this symbol is used it is always located in the left hand margin It indicates that the text to its immediate right is describing how to The how to symbol i do something RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Contents HEW Part sursniceusesncscepesheacemenncssenqinanacacsacanen EE E E nue meme eee 1 ls A OMGEV IG vatinccaniscncnat casa daheansmcaaacsunetacasassttaneneatee E tae 3 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files c cs cncssyssenassssssnassnssinavons
183. ed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character An example is shown below 358 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Example Comment H8S 2655 Series I O Register Definitions File Modules FileVersion 2 BaseAddress 0 Module1 Power_Down_Mode_Registers Module2 DMA_Channel_Common Module Module3 DMA_Channel_0 Module42 Bus_Controller Module43 System_Control Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common reg0 regDMAWER reg1 regDMATCR Module reg2 regDMACROA definition reg3 regDMACROB reg4 regDMACRIA reg5 regDMACR1B reg6 regDMABCRH reg7 regDMABCRL L dep regMSTPCRH 7 0 Register name Bit Value Register regDMAWER definition id DMAWER Oxffff00 B A H dmawer_bitfields Register name Address Size Absolute address flag Format Bit field dmawer_bitfields Bit field bit3 WE1B definition bit2 WE1A bit1 WE0B bit0O WE0A 359 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 360 7 EN
184. ed that random data is sorted in descending order 331 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 16 Break Function The emulator has PC and hardware break functions With the HEW a PC breakpoint can be set using the Breakpoint sheet of the Event window and a hardware break condition can be set using the Breakcondition sheet An overview and setting of the break function are described below 6 16 1 PC Break Function The emulator can set up to 255 PC breakpoints Other methods for setting a PC breakpoint than in section 6 7 Setting a PC Breakpoint are described below e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Eventpoint window is displayed e Select the Breakpoint sheet Eventpoint Condition Breakpoint A Breakcondition Figure 6 29 Eventpoint Window Before PC Breakpoint Setting 332 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Click the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Add from the popup menu e Enter H 000010D2 in the Address edit box Set Break Address Address conc Figure 6 30 Set Break Dialog Box e Click the OK button 333 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The PC breakpoint that has been set is displayed in the Eventpoint window Eventpoint Condition Breakpoint Enable Address H 000010D2 Tutorial cpp 47 Breakcondition
185. ed workspace does not remain In this section we describe the following three ways to start up the HEW e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is not in use e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is in use e Browse to another project workspace The operation of Open a recent project workspace radio button is same as the operation without specifying the workspace file when Browse to another project workspace is selected 200 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 1 Creating the New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button Welcome Figure 4 3 Welcome Dialog Box 201 ztENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 The Project Generator is started In this section we omit description of the settings for the toolchain If you have not purchased the toolchain the following dialog box is displayed Workspace Name ftest Project Name ftest Directory jox Hew test Browse CPU family H8 H8 300 7 Tool chain None x Properties Cre Figure 4 4 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Here for example enter test Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the wo
186. edded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build A file in a project can be individually excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis gt To exclude a file in a project from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which you want to be excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Exclude Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu figure 2 5 Then a red cross will be put on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build An excluded file can be included in the project again gt To include a file which has been excluded from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which has been excluded from build on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Include Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu Then a red cross will be removed from the file s icon and the file will be included in build 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools which are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and be used as input to the compiler phase figure 2 1 Typical Build Process Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For
187. ee eeceeecesecsseceseesecsaecaecaaecaeeeaeseneeeeeeaes 146 10 1 4 Changing your password 000 ceceeceeeeeeeeeceesceseceseceaeceaecaecaeecaecaesaeesaeeeeeeseeegs 147 10 1 5 Using the network HEW service eceeeecesecesecssecsecesecsaecaecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeenes 147 11 Difference VIC siiras eaaa i a aep naih 149 12 Technical SUppott sscccsscrin apr G 153 13 Navigation facilities ismer norrisi srami sir annsa prannat tira srao Eiana nu EiE 155 13 1 C Navigation component eeeeeseeeseeerrereeessrerrertsteetestertssretinrertrernrrererrreesre 157 13 2 C Function and defines navigation COMPONENS essesesssrererrrerrererrrrsrrererree 159 14 Smati Edito esiet EA E veh E E 161 Deb g ser Parterre teaserra ea e Eee EEE EE EEE E Ea as TA 165 Section COVERVIOW cx aacsansdaunccexeresnecnsaccasarenasqansceatoaecreaaseninpenteamesqaaresnaesanrnnansens 167 Wed WeatmIN GS i cvices Sages a evades tesa E E EE R E A eee ramen 170 1 2 Environmental Conditions ccssi scassccsecsesiscpscnsssiscesssseadesssssonessnazededebssassessbetcbusasnagedectbesas 171 13 COMPONE MS esl ss eccsscsssesbaes sucepsceaedeadvcsweusessonssesssevesbdessetyedvaegsscondetaensneupsesstdondeseceebensetaees 172 Section 2 Emulator Functions wisecii icscacssausceidansseanstansaastavestackdsiakacnspacnercloaniweness 173 PAEO E aiT E E E A wait ceseessed seer tap csoeuteenses deibueca ists eerebitews 173 2 2 Trace PUNCUONS 3 oi cescdesive dcvacvescsusesasteusescd ch
188. efines navigation components These components simply add the function and define definitions to the navigation view It is then possible to jump to these definitions by double clicking on the label you wish to view 159 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 160 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 14 Smart Editor Another feature of the High Performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the HEW editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completion help when using C classes and member functions gt To view the Smart edit status 1 Click on the Tools gt Options menu item 2 Select the Editor tab of the tools options dialog 3 The dialog in figure 14 1 is displayed The Enable Smart edit for C files should be checked 4 Click OK options 2xd Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Tab size 4 r Spacit E IV Enable auto indentation r General IV Save files before executing any tools IV Show files in notebook I Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring IV Enable Smart edit for C files r External editor I Use external editor Figure 14 1 Navigation view With this option switched on if you are working on a C file the smart edit capability should be enabled Note If the C
189. eholders Table D 1 lists the placeholders and their meanings Table D 1 Placeholders Placeholder Meaning FULLFILE Filename including full path FILEDIR File directory FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension EXTENSION File extension WORKSPDIR Workspace directory WORKSPNAME Workspace name PROJDIR Project directory PROJECTNAME Project name CONFIGDIR Configuration directory CONFIGNAME Configuration name HEW installation directory TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on option dialog TOOLDIR Tool installation directory on Tools Administration TEMPDIR Temp directory WINDIR Windows directory WINSYSDIR Windows system directory EXEDIR Command directory USERNAME User login Version control PASSWORD User password Version control HEWDIR VCDIR Virtual version control directory COMMENT Comment Version control LINE Line number of an error warning 353 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual For example the placeholders will be expanded as shown in table D 2 Table D 2 Placeholder Expansions Example Placeholder Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE c new workspace project fil
190. emulator supports the commands that can be used in the command line window For details refer to the online help 7tENESAS 367 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 368 7 ENESAS l High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix I Notes on HEW Note on Moving Source File Position after Creating Load Module When the source file is moved after creating the load module the Open dialog box may be displayed to specify the source file during the debugging of the created load module Select the corresponding source file and click the Open button Source Level Execution Source file Do not display source files that do not correspond to the load module in the program window For a file having the same name as the source file that corresponds to the load module only its addresses are displayed in the program window The file cannot be operated in the program window Step Even standard C libraries are executed To return to a higher level function enter Step Out In a for statement or a while statement executing a single step does not move execution to the next line To move to the next line execute two steps Operation During Accessing Files Do not perform other operations during downloading the load module or saving in the Verify Memory Save Memory or Trace window because this will not allow correct file accessing to be performed Watch Local variables at optimizatio
191. eneric Locals View ECX Register Generic Label View ECX H8 10T SYSTEM Generic Status View ECX 1 0 Generic EVENT View ECX 1 0 Generic Break View ECX 1 0 Symbol Record object reader 1 0 Generic Trace View ECX 2 0 Search disk Generic StackTrace View ECX 5 0 Generic Memory View ECX 1 0 ElfOwarf2 object reader 2 0 et Ranana Damiakar Lieu COM 1n _ i Uninstaller T Show all components Unregister Properties Erpat Tool information 2 a a a a 2 a a a a a 2 y Current HEW tools database location C Hew Figure 3 19 Highlighting the Product to be Uninstalled e ADELER tt 5 Click the Unregister button After the following message box is displayed click the Yes button High performance Embedded Workshop Unregistering this tool removes it from the HEW system consequently it will not be available to any HEW WorkSpace 4re you sure that you want to unregister it No Figure 3 20 Unregistering this tool Message Box This is the end of canceling the HEW registration Then remove the file for the emulator from the host computer 196 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 Click the Uninstaller button in the Tools Administration dialog box to open the Uninstall HEW Tool dialog box Uninstall HEW Tool Se a Wratrstell Figure 3 21 Uninstall HEW Tool Dialog Box 197 RENESAS High per
192. enesas microcontrollers The main features are A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options via an easy to use interface An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability A configurable environment to run your own tools An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application Version control support The High performance Embedded Workshop has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual About This Manual This manual is comprised of three parts HEW part Debugger Part and appendix HEW Part Information on the basic look and feel of the HEW and customizing the HEW environment and detail of the HEW s build function Debugger Part Emulator Functions Preparation before Use Preparations for Debugging Debugging and Tutorial Appendix Troubleshooting Regular Expressions Placeholders I O File Format Symbol File Format Menus Command Line Functions Notes on HEW and Diagnostic Test Procedure This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the resp
193. ent of the Output Window 000 cece cee eseeeeetneeeneeeneeees 30 21 File DS PEndencr 6S ss siorse d rrit ai seas r ar a EEEE a EE REESE 30 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window seessesesssssesesreesssrerrststreresrertsserrrsestesresrenrssrereses 31 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File eee ee ceecesecssecseeceecssecseeseesaeesaeeeeeeaes 31 2 ENESAS 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes eee eceecesecesecssecssecseeceeeaeseeeseeeeaeeeneeees 28 3 SHOW File Paths iissa ren i sanna ei obingevensansydes sonivonssedsetesdengneeses Setting the Current Project cece niner EE E EEE EE e Inserting a Project into a Workspace esseessesesesesseesrressesersrtestesrrsstrssrrsrtnseenrerneeseenseense Specifying Dependencies between Projects cece eeeesseeeeeeeeeesceseeeeeeereeeeeeesseesaeenaes Removing a Project from a Workspace cccssceseeessseceeeeeceeceeneecaeceeeeecsaeceaeesnaeeeeneeess Loading unloading a Project into from a Workspace eceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeees Relative projects paths in the Workspace cesceceseceeeceeeceeeeceeeeesaeceeeeecaeceeecsaeeeeneessas User folders in the Workspace cee ceceeseeseeeeeeeeeseeesecsceseceaecaecaecaecaeesaeeeaetaaesaeeaes Advanced Build Feat reS s irer sissien ai it E The Build
194. eplaced as the original instruction Select this option if the flash memory is rewritten by the user program and there is a problem with the state that the program in the flash memory has been replaced as the PC break code Notes 1 Includes interrupts in a break 2 The Step option function is not included in the R8C Tiny Interrupts during step execution are always disabled 233 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 2 Downloading a Program This section describes how to download a program and view it as source code or assembly language mnemonics Note After a break has occurred the HEW displays the location of the program counter PC In most cases for example if an Elf Dwarf2 based project is moved from its original path at the build the source file may not be automatically found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog box to allow you to manually locate the file 5 2 1 Downloading a Program A load module to be debugged must be downloaded To download a program select the load module from Debug gt Download or select Download from the popup menu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on the load module in Download modules of the Workspace window Note Before downloading a program it must be registered to the HEW as a load module For registration refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 234 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop
195. er In this case the hardware break and step functions cannot be used Selects whether or not the contents of the flash memory are acquired by the emulator when the user program is stopped or the position where the PC break is set is put back as the original code When the flash memory is not rewritten by the user program its contents need not be acquired by the emulator RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual If there is no problem with the state that the program in the flash memory has been replaced as the PC break code the position where the PC break is set needs not be put back as the original code Disable Read or write is not performed for the flash memory except when the emulator is activated the flash memory area is modified and the settings of the PC break to the flash memory area are changed PC to flash memory When the user program is stopped the specified PC break code is replaced as the original instruction Select this option if there is a problem with the state that the program in the flash memory has been replaced as the PC break code Flash memory to PC When the user program is stopped the contents of the flash memory are read by the emulator Select this option if the flash memory is rewritten by the user program PC to flash memory Flash memory to PC When the user program is stopped the contents of the flash memory are read by the emulator and the specified PC break code is r
196. ereso 15 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project cceescesccesseeceeeeeeeeceeeeessaeceeneesaeeeeeeecsaeeeeeeerss 17 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build cece ee ceeecesecsse snes ceeeseeseeseeeneeeneeees 19 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build eee ee ee ceeeceecsaecseeeaecsaeenaesaeetseeseeeeeeaes 19 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups cccesceeseeseesceescesscesecesecesecsaecaecseecaessaecsaeseeeaeseneeegs 19 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File oo eee eeceeceeeceeeceecesecsaecsaecsaecaeesaessaesaaesaeeeaeseneeees 24 2 5 Build Configurations 00 0 ceeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensecesecsaecsaecsaecseecaeesaeseaeseeeeaeseateegs 25 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration w2 s i cceicssiiesscussesisevesssessseascnsvons sovsetescevseeeesevbecesdensbeens 26 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations 0 0 eee ee cece cese cee cseeceeeaeeeseeeeeeaeeeneeees 26 26 Building a Project sorron omena a e a E E E Ea ee 28 26 1 Building a PLOjeCt sccccscs sec tcose sod csaveve ss devecsitpovectsvsacedscnsyonn sovadieacesqetsteescdeguyeenesels 28 2 6 2 Building Individual Files eee eceesceseceseceseceaecaecaecsaecsaessaesaeeeaeeeaeeees 28 26 3 Stopping a Builder rtre one eiaei E r R Er e e a 29 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects ee ceeesecssecssecseessecseecaeecaeesaecaeeceeeaeseeeeaeeenes 29 2 6 5 The Output Window ons s ccsiccvesssscezesssnssdeusenssccsedseesdeezcessdeasolactesceventosenuftenioeredets 29 2 6 6 Controlling the Cont
197. erformance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 6 13 is where the Hitachi Debugging Interface related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help IV Use extemal debugger HDI location 4 0 or greater C Hew HDIS SIM SH Hdi exe gt Browse Session file S CONFIGDIR S PROJECT NAME hds gt Browse Download module S CONFIGDIR S PROJECT NAME abs gt Browse Figure 6 13 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab To use an external debugger check the Use external debugger checkbox and specify the items described below There are three items of information which need to be specified Firstly the location of the HDI executable must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build Click the L
198. ertion TT Insert Template Insert the template selected in the drop down list at the current cursor position 66 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 Standard File Operations 4 3 1 Creating a New File gt To create a new editing window Select File gt New or click the new file toolbar button Cp or press CTRL N The window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 3 2 Saving a File gt To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save or click the save file toolbar button or press CTRL S 3 If the file has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed gt To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save As 3 A file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 67 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 3 Saving all Files gt To
199. es all variables in real time e Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update e Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined R s and cancels realtime update Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the popup menu Saving the Watch Window Contents in a File To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the popup menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten Opening a Memory Window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choose Go To Memory from the popup menu the Set Address dialog box opens showing the information start address end address and size of the selected variable as default Clicking OK opens the Memory window 284 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 12 4 Locals Window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window Opening the Locals Window To open the Locals window choose View gt Symbol gt Locals or click the Locals toolbar button a
200. eseeeaeeees 306 5 17 6 Resetting the Zoom Display 0 ceeeeceseesseesecesecssecseecaecaecsaecaeesaeetaesneeeaeeenes 307 5 17 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification ccc ceecesecsecssecsecsaecaecaeecaecaeceeeaeeeaes 307 5 17 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale wo eee eeceeeceseeeeceseceseceaecaecsaecaecsaessaecseeeeeenes 307 5 17 9 Non Display of Cursor eee cceeceeeceeeceeseesecesecesecaecscsaecsaecsaessaesaeeeeseneeegs 307 5 17 10 Displaying the Sampling Information eee ee eeee cece cee cneeteetaeeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 307 Section GO Tut rial csiis meseis eo E Eae ES EEE A RE eE R aes 309 6 1 Introductionis esere aenean E E ENEE EEE RERE EER EE REEE 309 6 2 Running the HEW wisi isin rnn E E eee athe 309 6 3 Setting up the Emulator ssir eesriie eraron ee eE ENE EEE EEEa ES 309 6 4 Setting the Configuration Dialog BOX sessseeessssesrseeessserrrerrsreeresreresreeresrenreserrreesrenesee 310 6 5 Checking the Operation of RAM cece eeeeeeeeceeeceeeceseceaeceeceaeeeaeesaecsaesaesaeeseesaeeeaeeees 312 6 6 Downloading the Tutorial Program eceeceesceeeceseeeecesecesecesecaecaaecsaeeaeeeaeseaeeeeeenes 314 6 6 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program eee eeceeeesecesecssecseeceeceesaeceetaeetaeeneeeaes 314 6 6 2 Displaying the Source Program 0 e ee eceecceeceseceseceseceseesecesecssecsaessaeeaeeeaeseneeees 315 6 7 Setting a PC Breakpoint ci scckcc tdecsccuseseessnvven ssheevendanssvacsstesanascnssouedenseceuseeed NEEESE a 316 6 8 Se
201. esnesaisdebe 246 5 4 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents 0 00 0 cese ese cseceseceeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeenes 246 Operating MEM Ory se sesc devsssbeccseeski cess casudea ti oes tes edecae ee asia eiee stands aasvineetaceeesntesee tate eseds 246 55 Viewinga Memory Area vicsi csscccscestesacecessecstesbetiecvessvendtonstensstdccesueeiecroustendeenedene 246 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats 00 0 0 ee ee eee eee cse ene ceeecnseteeseeeneeeaeeees 248 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display cece cece seeesecseecseecaeceecaeecaeceeeeesaeeaaes 248 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area eee cee cese cee csseeseceaecnsetsaecaeeeaeeeaeeees 248 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Contents cc eseecesecesecsseceseesecssecaecaeesaeeeaeseeeaeeenes 249 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range eee eeeeceescesecesecesecesecsseeaecsaecaesaesaeeeaeeeaeeees 249 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory eee cee cece ceeeceseceseceaeceaecaecaeecaesaesaeesaeesaeeeaeeaes 250 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value 0 cece cece cee cseecseessecneecaeecaeeeneeeeeaeeenes 251 5 59 Copying a Memory Atea ss cccsccssse sesscnastescedvsessees2nds sapsotscstsctevsesaceste teense sdizenscte dees 252 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area ee ee ceeceseceseceeceecssecnaeseeseeeeeeneeees 253 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents 0 0 cece eeeeeeecseeseeseetneeeeeeeeeeeeenes 254 5 5 12 Updating the Window Contents cece cee ceeeseecseeeeeeseecaeeeaeeaeesaeesaessee
202. ess is shown in figure 2 1 2 6 1 Building a Project The build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file test c include s the file header h and the latter has changed since the last build the file test c will be recompiled gt To perform a build Select Build gt Build or click the build toolbar button or press F7 or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build from the pop up menu The build all option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced gt To perform a build all Select Build gt Build All or click the build all toolbar button 6 or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build All from the pop up menu Both the build and the build all will terminate if any of the project files produce errors 2 6 2 Building Individual Files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually To build an individual file 1 Select the file which you want to build from the project window 2 Select Build gt Build File click the build file tool
203. esuethetyosseshedslnisesssestiebese 270 5 10 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints sseeesssessesesessrereeresrereserresreereserersrerrsre 270 EL DWark2 SUppotts seresa aaa E ER EE E EE ERE NE 273 311l CICA Operators sess avscsscateciaatadeessysecesdectedresessnlesysctacresceseessetbalposvien singineseseieases 273 511 2 CICHE EX pressions scccsasessesscesedsvsedsveescesdecesssbdecossandesswaeedescdsdicgecdepdocesdeeseieesensses 273 5 11 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 0 eee cee cscesee cece caeeaeceecaecaecaeecaesnaeeneenaees 274 5 11 4 Debugging an Overlay Program cece cee cece cae cnsecaeecaeeeaecaeecaeeeaeeaaesaeeeaes 275 Looking at Variables seinere ioeo ee EE oenehelsedepioceapes stcezesseaats 278 512 Tooltip Wath eses steescesesiecvezesnvsns rescezeceschescststdeseessgauies sebdgees seecevadenvngeoarde ssobesenedos 278 5 122 Instant Wath cssecscdcsscgsciseies senatveuicvassesecdantessdhanets scuanveeecuaeteta cles EEEE EESE 278 5 123 Watch Wind O Weesie E E EEE NE NENE 279 5 12 4 Locals Window cccccccsessssecececessnseceeececsesssesececeseuaesecececeesesaseeeesesesssaeeeeees 285 Using the Event Points 0 0 cece cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeceseceseceaecsaecsaecaaecaeeeaeeeaeeaaeenes 286 D131 PC Break pots csscc cscscs csheikidbdevencsiusctastea ieisbbees cvdedvasvannsebessesdousetossavendsapesnssctes 286 5513 2 Break Condoms sss siers pesana a ea Ee EEE eE E TEREE ESENES 286 5 13 3 Opening the Event W
204. f the insertion cursor B Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters Sy Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter Match Braces The match braces button highlights text between braces of type and This is particularly useful when attempting to find out the structure of C C code blocks which are opened with and closed with To use it select the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it and then click this button For further information on brace matching refer to the Brace Matching section later in this chapter T Insert Template To insert a pre defined template at the current cursor position click this toolbar button The Insert Template dialog box will be invoked Select a template name and then click OK For further information on templates refer to the Templates section later in this chapter oo Toggle Bookmark The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides standard bookmark capabilities To set a bookmark select the line to mark and click this button a green mark will then appear in the blank on the left side of
205. f the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency the dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or long word default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different 357 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not perform
206. files are scanned This means it may take some time if there are many files to fully complete the navigation view update Files are rescanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved 156 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 13 1 C Navigation component The C navigation component is the most complicated of the three supported navigation components It supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below in figure 13 2 Workspace ee ANIMAL 29C Classes demo g CPerson oy CCrocodile CCrocodileShark CMammal CReptile FF ee we Sa CHorse ee i we amp CGreatWhite CGreatWhite amp FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat amp FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood amp FeedTheShark char pszOtherT ype FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyF amp FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonl FeedTheShark void amp GetClassN ame void lt m_nDangerous QB m_nlaws E m_nSea E m_sttName Globals theap_area amp _siptr be bs amp bk amp INT Vectors nt Project Templates C navigation category title Project name Class n
207. formance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 Click the Start button to list the installed components Uninstall HEW Tool Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools Close C Hew Browse V Include subfolders Located Tools which can be uninstalled Component Version Installation Directory Uninstall E10T 5 1 5 C Tools Renesas DebugCom Search Status 1 file found Figure 3 22 Highlighting the Product to be Uninstalled Highlight the product name to be uninstalled and click the Uninstall button This is the end of uninstallation CAUTION A shared file may be detected while the program is being removed If another product may be using the shared file do not remove the file If another product does not start up after the removal process re install that product 198 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 4 Preparations for Debugging 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents HEW allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 4 1 illustrates this graphically C PROJECT o PROJECT WORKSPACE PROJECT Figure 4 1
208. g box is then displayed and the value can be changed Set the program counter to H 400 in this tutorial program and click the OK button Register PC Value H 000400 Set As Whole Register x Figure 6 8 Register Dialog Box PC 317 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 9 Executing the Program Execute the program as described in the following e To execute the program select Go from the Debug menu or click the Go button on the toolbar Gz Figure 6 9 Go Button When the program execution is started RUNNING is displayed on the status bar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been set and an arrow will be displayed in the Editor column to show the position that the program has halted with the message BREAKPOINT in the status bar Note When the source file is displayed after a break a path of the source file may be inquired The location of the source file is as follows lt HEW installation directory gt Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E 1 0T Tutorial source 0x00001054 0x0000105e 0x00001066 Ox00001072 Ox0000107a 0200001088 0x000010b6 0x000010c4 0x000010d2 0x000010e0 Ox000010 0 0x00001100 0x00001110 0x00001120 0x00001130 0x00001140 class Sample p_sam p_sam new Sample for i 0 i lt 10 i Jf j rand iffj lt of oe he ali j p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt changela
209. g to be modified from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click OK to confirm the edits gt To remove an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Remove button Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Consider the scenario shown in figure 8 9 Here are three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL C Mapped To NETWORK X C work application project1 X ve sw app project1 C work application src X ve sw app srce C work shared X ve sw shared Figure 8 9 Example Mappings Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET S VCDIR FILENAME When the HEW executes the c
210. gt Components menu item 2 The component gallery dialog is displayed This is displayed in figure 5 14 3 Select the component you wish to load Click the load button The components image should change to the loaded state 4 If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state 5 Click OK to verify the changes Component Gallery x Project E Application Extensions ITRON component aren me Loaded component e OSEK component Cancel Custom memory view component Pin view component Unloaded component Intermediate state component Load il Figure 5 14 Component Gallery Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Multiple projects and All projects items to change a components load status over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 99 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 Custom Project Types The Project gt Create Project Type menu item in HEW allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and
211. gt Previous Bookmark from the local menu or click the previous bookmark toolbar button ma To remove all bookmarks in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks or select Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks from the local menu or click the clear all bookmarks toolbar button hl Printing a File To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select File gt Print or click the print toolbar button E or press CTRL P 74 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 Configuring Text Layout The following sections detail how to set up the layout of the text within the editor windows 4 8 1 Page Set up When you print a file from the High performance Embedded Workshop editor the settings in the print dialog box affect the way in which the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the page set up option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder gt To set up the page margins 1 Select File gt
212. has three activation modes 1 A mode in which the emulator program is started after it has been downloaded to the target device This mode is used when there is no emulator program in the flash memory of the target device 2 A mode in which the emulator program is started without downloading it to the target device This mode is used when there is an emulator program in the flash memory of the target device 3 A mode in which the emulator is used as the flash memory writer This mode is used when the emulator is used for writing to flash memory The emulator provides the following features e Realtime emulation Realtime emulation of the user system is enabled at the maximum operating frequency of the MCU e Excellent operability Using the HEW High performance Embedded Workshop on the Microsoft Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 or Microsoft Windows XP operating system enables user program debugging using a pointing device such as a mouse e Various debugging functions Various break and trace functions enable efficient debugging Breakpoints and break conditions can be set by the specific window trace information can be displayed on a window and command line functions can be used e Debugging of the user system in the final development stage The user system can be debugged under conditions similar to the actual application conditions e Compact debugging envir
213. he BREAKPOINT can be set for the flash memory area by the emulator 2 5 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the stack s information to display the name of the calling function for a function at which the program counter is currently pointing This function can be used only when the load modules that have the following formats are loaded H8 family C C compiler such as PCOO8CAS5 MNR Dwarf2 For the usage of this function refer to section 6 19 Stack Trace Function 2 6 Online Help An online help explains the usage of each function or the command syntax that can be entered from the command line window Select Emulator Help from the Help menu to view the emulator help 177 7tENESAS 178 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 3 Preparation before Use 3 1 Emulator Preparation Unpack the emulator and prepare it for use as follows A WARNING READ the reference sections shaded in figure 3 1 before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Unpack the emulator Component list Check the components against the component list When the emulator is used first Set up the emulator Section 3 Install the emulator s software Insert the card emulator Start the HEW Section 4 When the emulator Turn on the
214. he address where it was found is displayed in a message box 255 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Select Load from the popup menu of the Memory window to open the Load Program dialog box Load Program a 1 a 21 xi Format Open Cancel File name Offset address H o0000000 Access size I Perform memory verify during download Figure 5 23 Load Program Dialog Box Enter the file format Format and the file name File name If the load address value is to be changed enter the offset value in the offset field Offset address otherwise enter zero 256 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 6 Viewing the I O Memory A microcomputer contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but the typical modules are DMA controller serial communications interface A D converter bus state controller and watchdog timer Registers that are mapped to the microcomputer s address space controls the on chip peripheral modules The Memory window enables you to look at data in continuous memory addresses as byte word longword single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values However registers of different sizes are allocated to non continuous memory addresses
215. he local menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more to match 85 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 13 Editor Column management The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by debugger feature You can choose the column to display undisplay A include lt no_float h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt math h gt include lt stdlib h gt void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int O0x00000a0c void main void 0x00000816 lt long a 16 min max long j int i 0x00000a18 srand 1 0x00000a20 gt printf Data Input itit n 0x00000a2c for i 6 i lt 10 i lt Ox00000a2e j rand 0x00000a36 if j lt 6 lt 0x00000a38 j j gt 0x00000a3a ali j 0x00000a44 printf a d 1d n i a i F 0x00000a62 sort a Ox00000a66 printf x Sorting results n Ox00000a72 for i O i lt 10 i 0x00000a74 printf a d 1d n i a i ITE ot TE Figure 4 16 Editor columns gt To switch off a column in all source files 1 Right click on the editor window Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Col
216. he toolbar 2 DetautSession FUR T A B i Figure 4 28 Toolbar Selection 222 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e From the dialog box 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions This will open the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 Debug Sessions Debug sessions Current session DefaultSession ki Figure 4 29 Debug Sessions Dialog Box 2 Select the session you want to use from the Current session drop down list 3 Click the OK button to set the session 223 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 2 Adding and Removing Sessions A new session can be added by copying settings from another session or removing a session e To add a new empty session 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 29 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 30 Check the Add new session radio button Enter a name for the session Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box This creates a file with the name entered in step 4 If a file with this name already exists Dunk WN an error is displayed Add new session Add new session Name Cancel l Use an existing session file Name Tutorial Session file path ne Browse V Open and maintain link to session file Make session file link read only
217. he way in which the version control tool is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command If this check box is set then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed figure 8 15 which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated check box Clicking OK will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking Cancel will abort the operation History MEI Eiles Midemo c c hew demo demo sbrk c c hew demo demo Cancel Mvecttbl sre c hew demo demo Figure 8 15 Command Prompt Dialog Example 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this check box 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the placeholder VCDIR it uses the backward slash character V to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then set the Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up Each workspace can have a different version contr
218. hown to the left of the Trim Source menu To restore the white space choose Trim Source while the check mark is shown 297 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 15 Viewing the Function Call History The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 5 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button BS Stack Trace Kind Nane Value tutorial 0x10e0 main 0x1046 PowerON_Reset 4 0x0420 Figure 5 52 Stack Trace Window The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol 5 15 2 Viewing the Source Program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to display in the Source window the source program corresponding to the selected function 298 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 15 3 Specifying the View Choose View Setting from the popup menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings Stack Trace Setting Figure 5 53 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trac
219. iation is completed tutorialcpp y aixi Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help 18 x DsAG S eealOTa m p S Hsleus 2 am ave ila i a el Ar eo a amp ocrra e E107 Sx Aw S S 2a BP A SATS PARNAPOS Fe amp s S 8 e a a p 28 92 B Tutorial Tutorial I Assembly source file 5 C header file sbrkh sorth stackscth source file dbsctc sbrk c C source file resetpre cpp sort cpp wnload modules Tutorialabs Dependencies E tele ig O bs 19 loigis EES 21 Connected z ix T EERS RER AAA AA A A ACA A AA AACA AAA AA A ERRE ft FILE iTutorial cpp DESCRIPTION Main Program This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Yer 3 1 ioe doiei ek dee dog fog de ek ao ge He a a A eR eR A ACR A eR A ACA A A A A A EEEN tifdef __cplusplus extern C tlendif void abort void ifdef _cplusplus tendif include sort h include lt stdlib h gt void tutorial void void main void while 1 tutorial ita tutorial cpp STE Built Debug A Findin Files _Version Control 7 Note Read write 6 64 Figure 3 10 HEW Window When the user program has already been downloaded to the flash memory source level debugging cannot be executed because there is no debugging information on the user program after the emulator has been activated Be sure t
220. icability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corp semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corp for further details on these materials or the products contained therein High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Introduction The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at R
221. ient machines then use the service this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine is notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This structure is shown below in figure 10 1 Networked workspace and project B Networked_Data_Example Sy Networked_Data_Example H Debug J SimDebug SH 2 Network access Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files on the network The clients cannot directly communicate with each other either All communication is directed Clients through the server machine Figure 10 1 Network database access structure The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Note Certain operations are locked when other clients are carrying them out Th
222. iles Description Add C C Standard Library Help e hew2 tools hitachi s Remove _ Ey F Default help file C C Standard Library Help 7 Figure 6 7 Customize Dialog Help Tab 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog will be displayed figure 6 8 3 Enter a description of the help file into the Title field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking on the Browse button 5 Click OK to define the new help file Add Help File BEI Title OK Programming in ANSI C Cancel Path fe flesthelp ansihip Figure 6 8 Add Help File Dialog 106 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default help file drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file when F1 is pressed 6 4 Specifying Workspace Options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog figure 6 9 To invoke it select Tools gt Options and select the Workspace tab Options 2f xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network MV Restore files on opening workspace I Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace I Save workspace before executing any tools J P
223. in this manual The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 3 22 is where the High performance Debugging Interface related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help MV Use extemal debugger HDI location V4 0 or greater C Hew HDIS SIM SH Hdi exe gt Browse Session file S CONFIGDIR S PROJECT NAME hds gt Browse Download module S CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME abs gt Browse Figure 3 22 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab When an external debugger is used check Use external debugger and then set the following items Firstly the location of the HDI executable must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build 60 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file al After a build if the downl
224. in the I O memory To handle this memory the HEW has the IO window to facilitate checking and setting up of these kinds of registers 5 6 1 Opening the IO Window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View I O toolbar button Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed Name Address Value Access Aj SEmi System Control 0cr OOFFEDE H 8 E syscr OOFFEDES H 01 Q Interrupt_Controller C Bus_Controller Q Data_Transfer_ Control I 0 Port 1 G I 0_Port_3 G I70 Port_4 I 0_Port_7 I I 0_Port_9 C I 70 _Port_A I 0_ Port B I0 Port C A TIN Dart N of b Figure 5 24 IO Window AAR eee 257 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers click the mark at the left of the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the gt key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Clicking the mark at the left of the expanded module name or pressing the lt key will close the I O register display For a display in the bit
225. indow ssssseessseesesseessstressstereeresreerssterreserresesresrsrerrsee 286 5 13 4 Setting PC Break point 1 2 3 ciscc ccisscsnssvenscnasieisebeeccscedetevenetenesderiecedecvonsenesusesobseles 287 III Ad isn A iis Sc eee ea eae 287 3 13 60 Editii eneee e e E E E EE E EE S 288 5137 Enable koee neie earmer ee ea ea a a aE EE ini 288 D138 Disable scien aren an E EE E EEEE RE 288 DLII Delete a aena E E E E TR on E ERRE N E 288 3 13 10 Delet AM ssisiser tisrin peronra arro e EEE EEE ETE ne EEEE iS 288 SAI lT GOTO SOUC Eeee a E a a o E A E Eoi 288 5 13 12 Set Break Dialog BOX cee eeecceeecessseceeeeeesaeceeeeeaaeceneecsaeeeeneecaeeeeeeessaeeneneeess 289 5 13 13 Setting Break Conditions eee ceecesecescesecesecsseesecesecaecsecsaecsaecaesaeesaeenaes 290 DVS V4 Da V E E E E E sectapives sceedes extensessves 291 5 13 15 Enable ccs cokcsicbin isnadees scuevensedasteusecesesobdved E E E NEA EEEE E ETERS 291 9 13 16 Disa Blen E E EA 291 3 13 17 Deleter eee E E EEE E EAE E EE 292 518 Delete AM irigosene irere nietos eini esoes ne ire E E DEEE E ES oa 292 313 19 G tO SOUTCO sissies so testnsscnsetensotactescedaevendesorcensetatssieeys cbenabeasdetevdes sonsetaasedacivesensneeses 292 5 13 20 Sequential Conditions eee eee sseesecesecssecsseesecsaecsaecsecsaecsaessaesaecaesaeeeaaesaes 292 5 13 21 Editing Break Conditions 0 eee ceeceseceecesecesecsseeaecaecsaecsaesaecaecseetaeesaeenaes 292 5 13 22 Modifying Break Conditions 0 0 0 ce
226. indow will be blank Oxffde lone 1 0 HO000698F Oxff4e lone H 000037db Oxff52 lone H 00003714 Oxff56 lone H 000031 4 Oxff5a lone H 0000295a Oxff5e lone H 00002525 Oxff 2 lone H 00001e91 Oxff 6 lone H 00001586 Oxff a lone H 00000420 Oxff e lone H00000314 Oxff72 lone Oxff4e lone 107 Figure 5 42 Watch Window This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed 279 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable Value Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution For updating of the content of the variable that has been registered in the Watch window read the data after the break in user program execution Note The realtime operation for the user program is disabled because the
227. ing Specify the timing for executing the command chain in the Command batch file load timing drop down list box In addition register the command chain file that is executed at the specified timing in the Command Line Batch Processing list box 213 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 2 Downloading a Program A download module is added under Download modules in the Workspace window Open the load module of Download modules in the Workspace window by clicking the right hand mouse button and select Download module to start downloading the module sort cpp tutorial cpp 3 Download modules Download module Download module debug data only Unload module E3 Dependenc Configure View v Allow Docking E Projects Templa Hide Figure 4 16 Download Menu of the Workspace Window Projects Notes 1 When load modules are downloaded select Debug gt Download gt All DownLoad Modules 2 The emulator downloads programs to the flash memory just before execution of the user program 214 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 3 Setting the Writing Flash Memory Mode The following describes the procedures when the emulator is used as the programming tool The load module to be downloaded to the new workspace is registered and programmed a Select the new project workspace New Project Worksp
228. ion thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Of those files which are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe some will be checked in and others will be checked out i e being edited by a user The status command displays the current status of a file or file s gt To view the status of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose status you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 Ifa file has a blue tick next to it a user different to you has checked it out 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project To view the history of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose history you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Show History menu option 140 RENESAS High perfo
229. is means that if one machine is currently changing the toolchain options all of the other machines can only see read only versions of this data Note The performance of HEW does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version control 143 RENESAS 10 1 1 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enabling network access To use network access 1 2 3 10 1 2 gt Tos 1 eI AAR WH 144 Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in figure 10 2 Click the enable network access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrator has the highest level of access Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog until this is completed This is described below Setting the administrator user s password et the password Continue from the previous sections steps Click the password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled The password dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 10 3 The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin Type the new password into both
230. is the following note 371 7tENESAS 17 1 0e 19 20 21 pan 22 23 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual When the breakpoint that has been set as Disable is specified as the stop address note that the breakpoint becomes Enable when the user program stops Memory Access during User Program Execution When a memory is accessed from the memory window etc during user program execution the user program is resumed after it has stopped in the E10T emulator to access the memory Therefore realtime emulation cannot be performed The stopping time of the user program is as follows Environment Host computer 550 MHz x 2 Xeon M H8 3048F ONE 25 MHz system clock frequency When a one byte memory is read from the command line window the stopping time will be about 308 ms Internal Flash Memory The actual MCU which has been used by connecting to the emulator has been written to the flash memory at emulation and stressed Do not use the MCU that has been used for debugging for the mass products The MCU which has not been used for debugging is also available as the programming tool for mass production Suspend during Emulator Use Do not set the host computer as the suspend mode while using the emulator If the host computer enters the suspend mode exit and restart the HEW Verification of Memory Use the FILE_VERIFY command to verify memory Do not use Verify Memory in the
231. its identity RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual LP FFE HE HE AAAS E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE AN JEJE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JEJE JE E AN JE JE JE JE JE JE JE A JE JE JE JE AN JE JE JE JE JEJE JE JE JE AAAI AAAS eS 7 FILE sbrk c 7 DATE Mon Jun 23 2003 DESCRIPTION Program of sbrk 7 CPU TYPE H857 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 2 6 2E 2E FE IE JE DE E JE IE JE E JE E JE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE AAAS JE JE JE JE JE E JE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE EJE FE JEME FE include lt no_float h gt include lt stdio h gt include sbrk h const size_t _sbrk_size Specifies the minimum unit of the defined heap area 7 static union long dummy Dummy for 4 byte boundary char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed by sbrk jheap_area static char brk char amp heap_area End address of area assigned Z FEFE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JEEE xj resetprg c sbrk c Figure 1 17 Editor Window The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Format Views
232. l not operate Restart the host computer 2 When the emulator is a PCMCIA card 1 2 6 Shut the operating system down and turn off the power to the host computer Insert the PCMCIA card emulator in the host computer s slot Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer Start the host computer and log on with an administrator level user name The setting value should be checked beforehand because during emulator installation inquiries are made about the resource used by the PCMCIA card emulator Start the Start menu gt Programs gt Administrative Tools Common gt Windows NT Diagnostics check the status of the IRQ I O port and memory from the resource panel and determine the setting values that do not conflict with other devices The following resources are used IRQ one channel I O port H F byte and memory H 4000 byte Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator For a component be sure to select PC Card Driver PCMCIA There is a check box for selecting the type name of each product under the PC Card Driver PCMCIA component Select the appropriate type name If the correct name is not selected the correct driver will not be installed and the emulator will not operate Restart the host computer Notes The driver that has been selected in the Drivers component starts after the host computer is initiated If the host computer is initiated with the card discon
233. la ARA a ll 28 eG Debug H8 ooo _E10T_ 7 SessionH8 ooo _E10T_5 7 At a I IE ae mea cats i MaPoOss lE De amp 4 B a Eat LE Tx0000105e Tort i20 i lt 10 EMG Tutorial 0x00001066 j rand 1 Tutorial 0x00001072 ifG lt of E3 Assembly source fi 0x0000107a ae E Sy C header fil sot n ox00001088 alil i sorth 0x000010b6 p_sam gt sort a stackscth Ox000010c4 p_sam gt change a source file ox000010a2 gt s0 al0 x p_sam gt s0 a eee 0x000010e0 posam gt s1 al1 bike 0x000010 0 p_sam gt s2 a 2 source file 0x00001100 p_sam gt s3 a 3 resetpre cpp 0x00001110 p_sam gt s4 a 4 sortepp 000001120 p_sam gt s5 a 5 tutorial 0x00001130 p_sam gt s6 a 6 utorialcpp S 000001140 p_sam gt s7 al7 Download modules 0x00001150 p_sam gt s8 a 8 000001160 p_sam gt s9 a 9 B Dependencies elete ip sen ig O isisi B C E n B ZI BREAK POINT one iO E Flash memory writing H 0000794b Oxtfde lone Flash memory write end H 000059e2 Oxff52 lone H0000446b Oxff56 lone 7 H 000041c6 Oxff5a lone Flash memory writing H 00003154 Oxff5e lone Flash memory write end H100002781 Oxff62 long STOP ADDRESS mars Find in Files A _ Version Control STOP ADDRESS Read write 47 64 Figure 6 25 HEW Window Step Over 329 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 14 F
234. ld like to remove 2 Click the Remove button To view the properties of a system phase 1 Select the system phase that you would like to examine 2 Click the Modify button gt To move a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to move 2 Click the Move Up or Move Down button gt To import a phase 1 Click the import button A dialog is displayed which allows the user to browse to an existing project to import a custom phase from 2 Choose the location of the project you wish to import a custom phase from Once selected a dialog is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Selecting a phase name and then clicking properties displays the custom phase details This allows you to decide whether the phase does the functionality you require 4 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and then click OK The phase will then be added to the build phases dialog at the bottom of the build order 47 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To modify a custom phase 1 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The modify phase dialog will be invoked with the Command tab selected figure 3 7 3 Change the contents of the fields as appropriate 4 Set the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box if you don t want the HEW to abort the exec
235. le Samplel 24 00001034 ODO6 MOV W RO R6 37 for i 0 i lt 10 i Df gt 0000103C 19EE SUB W E6 E6 lt il Figure 5 5 Disassembly Window 238 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code You can modify the assembly language code by double clicking on the instruction that you want to change The Assembler dialog box will be opened Assembler Address Code Mnemonic O000102E 79370028 SUB W H 0028 R7 OK Cancel Figure 5 6 Assembler Dialog Box The address instruction code and mnemonic are displayed Enter the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonics field Pressing the Enter key will replace the memory content with the new instruction and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will replace the memory content with the new instruction and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing the Esc key will close the dialog box without modifying the memory contents Note The assembly language code being displayed is the current memory content If the memory contents are changed the Assembler dialog box and the Disassembly window will show the new assembly language code but the source file displayed in the Source window will be unchanged This is the same even if the source file contains assembly codes 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address When you are viewing your program in the Disasse
236. le Dialog The HEW will create a subdirectory make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it It is named after the selection with a mak extension for example the current project and configuration e g project_debug mak The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by the HEW It is not intended to execute makefiles which have been user modified gt To execute a makefile 1 Open a command window and change to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options which include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 61 RENESAS 62 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Using the Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that is provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 1 The Editor Window The editor window figure 4 1 contains the file windows that are being
237. le to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 9 Build Phases 2 xi Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Eile group Phase order C source file 4 Figure 3 9 Build Phases Dialog Build File Order Tab The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure 3 9 the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 3 4 Setting Custom Build Phase Options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option on the Options menu To specify options f
238. le to be opened 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into the Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 6 Click OK to define the editor Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a build file build or build all operation 6 6 Customizing File Save The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to customize file save on the Editor tab of the Options dialog figure 6 11 To open the tab select Tools gt Options and click the Editor tab The following sections explain the options related to file save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving edited files before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save files before executing any tools check box 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 111 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 7 Using an External Debugger The High p
239. lect the file and click Open to start loading The standard file extension for symbol files is sym 5 8 7 Saving Labels into a File Choose Save As from the popup menu to open the Save Symbols dialog box The Save Symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save File As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files is sym See appendix E Symbol File Format for details on the symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the popup menu 263 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 8 Searching for a Label Choose Find from the popup menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label 2 x I Match Case P x Cancel Figure 5 32 Find Label Dialog Box Enter all or part of the label name that you wish to find into the edit box and click OK or press the Enter key The HEW searches the label list for a label name containing the text that you entered Note The label is only stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters Labels are case sensitive 5 8 9 Searching for the Next Label Choose Find Next from the popup menu to find th
240. lt 10 i sbrk h 0x0000083e j rand stackset h iffii lt nig A gt gt Demo_H8S2 F Connected Find in Files Readwite 1793 Figure 1 2 HEW Main Window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files which are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on 1 2 1 The Title Bar The title bar displays the name of the currently open workspace project and file It also contains the standard minimize maximize and close buttons Click the minimize button to minimize the HEW on the windows start bar Click the maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting File gt Exit or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 The Menu Bar The menu bar contains nine menus File Edit View Project Options Build Tools Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you wanted to open a file then the file menu is where you will find the right menu option if you wanted to set up a tool then the tools menu is the correct selection The following sections will cover the functions of the various menu options as they become 4 RENESAS High
241. lts with the message BREAK POINT displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window and the Source or Disassembly window is updated with the PC breakpoint line marked with an arrow in the gutter Note When a break occurs the program stops just before it is about to execute the line or instruction at which you set a PC breakpoint If you choose Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the line marked with an arrow will be the next instruction to be executed 270 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e To set a PC breakpoint by using the Breakpoints dialog box Selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoint displays the Breakpoints dialog box Breakpoints demo c Line 22 Cancel Edit Code Remove Remove All Figure 5 35 Breakpoints Dialog Box The Breakpoints dialog box allows the user to view the current breakpoints set Clicking the Edit Code button displays the source where each breakpoint is set The Remove or Remove All button deletes one or all breakpoints respectively The check box of each breakpoint enables or disables the breakpoint e To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle the PC Breakpoints setting by either double clicking in the BP column of the line where the PC breakpoint is set or placing the cursor on the line and pressing the F9 key The setting to be toggled depends on the debugging platform Notes on Setting the Breakpoint Dialog Box
242. mands set the Save workspace before executing any phases check box 108 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 6 4 6 Default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Workspace dialog One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the root directory However if you would like to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces then enter the desired directory into the field or browse to it graphically via the Browse button 6 4 7 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk 109 RENESAS 6 5 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Using an External Editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the Workspace window Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the Output window
243. may not operate correctly check the MCU settings Figure 3 15 Boot Failed Dialog Box 3 If an incorrect driver has been selected the following dialog box will appear please choose another driver ad Unable to restore the previous driver settings Figure 3 16 Unable to restore the previous driver settings Dialog Box 193 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 6 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software Follow this procedure to remove the installed emulator s software from the user s host computer As the installed product is registered with the HEW uninstall the product on the HEW screen 1 Activate the HEW 2 Click the Administration button in the Welcome dialog box Welcome Figure 3 17 Welcome Dialog Box 194 2tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 The Tools Administration dialog box is opened Tools Administration 4 Debugger Components H Uneaste Extension Components UATenIster Epe Bapor Figure 3 18 Tools Administration Dialog Box 195 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Click the mark at the left of Debugger Components in the Registered components list box to list the installed components Then highlight the product name to be uninstalled Tools Administration Registered components Component A Debugger Components E Cancel Generic Watch View ECX j G
244. mbly window you may wish to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select Set Address from the popup menu and the dialog box shown in figure 5 7 is displayed Set Address tte _main Cancel Figure 5 7 Set Address Dialog Box 239 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enter the address in the Address edit box and either click on the OK button or press the Enter key A label name can also be specified as the address The Disassembly window will be updated to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 11 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address Wherever you can enter an address or value into the HEW you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by the hash character the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you enter the expression pc in the Set Address dialog box the Source or Disassembly window will display the current PC address It also allows the offset of the current PC to be displayed by entering an expression with the PC register plus an offset e g PC 0x 100 240 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Work
245. mes this may not be desirable If so open the Tools Administration dialog select the component from the Registered components list and then click the Unregister button A dialog will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to confirm the action Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from hard disk It simply removes the information which the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at anytime by registering the tool see above If you want to remove a component from the hard disk i e uninstall a component then refer to the section Uninstalling Components later in this chapter 92 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Registered components list and then click the Properties button The properties dialog will be displayed with the General tab selected figure 5 4 This tab displays the name version and location of the selected component None of the information on this tab is editable H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties 2 xi General Information Environment Name H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Version 5 0 2 0 Location c hewtools hitachi h845_0_2 Cancel Figure 5 4 Properties Dialog General Ta
246. mplate is inserted into a file a dialog is displayed which allows you to enter some custom text for each of these fields This text is then inserted instead of the placeholder You can define ten of these user input fields file z gt OK a Cancel Add R User Input Y Shortcuts ALT 1 x Figure 4 14 Define Template Dialog A new addition to the HEW 3 0 is the templates view This is shown in figure 4 15 This view is located with the workspace and navigation windows 83 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual E B E Templates Header ile amp T o0lChain Templates Figure 4 15 Templates view Any new templates which have been added to the HEW are displayed under the templates folder The toolchain templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the HEW system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file Itis also possible to drag an area of text from the editor into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on this view displays a pop up so that you can quickly add a new template remove the current selection and edit the current selection 4 12 2 Deleting a Template gt To delete a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click
247. mplete the project window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies gt To update a project s dependencies Select Build gt Update All Dependencies or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Update All Dependencies from the pop up menu Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder figure 2 20 i 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window If you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File If you select Show dependencies under each file the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders figure 2 20 ii If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies figure 2 20 i ij e Workspace 5 F Demo fef Deno B Assembly source file E lowlv ste ource file dbsct c Demo c intpra c i Workspace B Assembly source file E lowlviste Sy C source file dbsct c Demo c intprg c lowste c resetprg c sbrk c vecttbl c ependencies iB A SRS
248. n Depending on the generated object code local variables in a C source file that is compiled with the optimization option enabled will not be displayed correctly Check the generated object code by displaying the Disassembly window If the allocation area of the specified local variable does not exist displays as follows Example The variable name is asc asc target error 2010 xxxx Variable name specification When a name other than a variable name such as a symbol name or function name is specified no data is displayed Example The function name is main main 369 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Line Assembly Input radix Regardless of the Radix setting the default for line assembly input is decimal Specify H or Ox for the H8 series microcomputers and xxxxh for the R8C series microcomputers as the radix for a hexadecimal input Command Line Interface Batch file To display the message Not currently available while executing a batch file enter the sleep command Adjust the sleep time length which differs according to the operating environment Example To display Not currently available during memory_fill execution sleep d 3000 memory_fill 0 ffff 0 File specification by commands The current directory may be altered by file specifications in commands It is recommended to use absolute paths to specify the files in a command file so th
249. n the BP column can set or clear a software breakpoint at the start of the function 5 8 2 Adding a Label Choose Add from the popup menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label Add Label Name Address H o0000000 7 Cancel Figure 5 27 Add Label Dialog Box Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 11 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 8 3 Editing a Label Choose Edit from the popup menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label _main ue po OOOO O O O Address H o0001 ooo 7 Cancel Figure 5 28 Edit Label Dialog Box Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 11 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 261 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 4 Deleting a Label To delete a label select the label and choo
250. name of emulator device group lt HEW installation directory gt Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E 10T IOFiles 5 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 258 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 7 Viewing the Current Status Choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status toolbar button B to open the Status window and see the current status of the debugging platform H8 xxxx ELOT USB SYSTEM HS xxxx Ready ONE STEP END Run time count 0000h000min000s060ms Emulation mode Normal Big Figure 5 25 Status Window The Status window has three sheets e Memory sheet Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file e Platform sheet Contains information about the current status of the emulator typically including CPU type and emulation mode and the state of execution e Events sheet Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information Note The items that can be set in this window differ depending on the emulator in use For details refer to the online help 259 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 Looking at Labels When the user program that includes the
251. nce Embedded Workshop User s Manual When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty gt To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog onto the toolbar Customize Figure 6 3 Customize Dialog Commands Tab 102 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button in figure 6 1 changes to the Delete button Then click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button
252. nd white Mode Specifies the format RGB BGR YCbCr Bit Pixel Sampling Format Buffer Information R red G green and B blue B blue G green and R red Y luminance Cb color difference for blue and Cr color difference for red Specifies bits pixel valid when RGB or BGR is selected Specifies the format of sampling valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies chunky planar valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Specifies the first address in memory of the area for display as image Specifies the first address in memory of the color palette data in hexadecimal notation valid when 8Bit has been selected for Specifies the width of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Specifies the height of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Data Address data in hexadecimal notation Palette Address RGB or BGR Width Height Size Specifies the width and height of the image Width Pixel Height Pixel Buffer Size View Information Displays the size of the buffer required for image display as obtained from the width and height in hexadecimal notation Specifies the location size and data start location of the part to be displayed among the entire image View Mode Full Size Part Size Specifie
253. ndow and double clicking allows the values at that point to be changed Data can also be directly edited around the current position of the text cursor 313 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 6 Downloading the Tutorial Program 6 6 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program Download the object program to be debugged In this emulator it is enabled to download the program and set the PC breakpoint in the internal flash memory area For the method to set the PC breakpoint refer to section 6 16 1 PC Break Function e Select Download module from Tutorial abs under Download modules Tutorial Tutorial E Assembly source file 4 C header file sbrk h sorth stackscth C source file dbsctc E sbrk c C source file B resetpre cpp B sort cpp B tutorial cpp Download modules Dependencies Download module 2 sbrkh Download module debue data only Z sorth Unload module stackscth Configure View Allow Docki EPProjects E Templates go T ee ide Figure 6 4 Downloading the Tutorial Program 314 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 6 2 Displaying the Source Program The HEW allows the user to debug a user program at the source level e Double click tutorial cpp under C source file 0x0000105e fort i 0 i lt l0 i D4 EG Tutorial Ox00001066 j
254. nected or with the incorrect driver installed the driver cannot start up and the service control manager informs the system of an error This problem however is easily resolved by installing the correct driver or connecting the card 181 7tENESAS 3 2 3 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Installing under Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating System 1 When the emulator is a PCI card 1 2 Log on with an administrator level user name Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator When a component is selected be sure to select PCI Card Driver Shut the operating system down and turn off the power to the host computer Insert the PCI card emulator in a slot on the host computer Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer Restart the host computer and log on with an administrator level user name The hardware is now recognized and the driver is automatically installed 2 When the emulator is a PCMCIA card 1 2 4 Note 182 Log on with an administrator level user name Install the H8 xxxx E10T emulator When a component is selected be sure to select PC Card Driver PCMCIA Insert the PCMCIA card emulator in the host computer s slot Refer to section 3 2 Connecting the Card Emulator to the Host Computer The hardware is now recognized and the driver is automatically installed When Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed select the Sear
255. ned below gt To change the colors viewed in the difference window 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The format views dialog is displayed 2 Expand the difference view The dialog is shown and looks the same as figure 11 6 3 Select the category you want to change The color display tab is displayed and allows modification The categories available are Left hand side moved lines Left hand side different lines Right hand side moved lines and Right hand side different lines 4 Click OK to keep the changes 151 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Format iews D LHS Different Lines D LHS Moved Lines D AHS Different Lines D RHS Moved Lines D Text Output HEW Sample Text Remove Figure 11 6 Format views dialog 152 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 12 Technical Support The High performance Embedded Workshop has a number of integrated technical support features gt To check for HEW product updates or service packs 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Check website for updates 2 Your default web browser is invoked and defaults to the HEW download page for your region 3 Browse this area for HEW updates to fix bugs or add new features Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with the HEW application If a problem does occur that results in a application crash the HEW bug tracking program will be
256. ning and Group regular expression items into subexpressions which are treated as a single unit For example whereas ab matches a ab abb and so on ab matches the empty string ab abab and so on and are not treated as special characters inside a bracket expression Escapes a regular expression character causing it to be treated as a regular character For example whereas ab indicates a subexpression consisting of ab ab denotes the sequence of characters a b and Note To specify the character in C source code you must specify as the C compiler treats the character as special denoting the beginning of an escape sequence embedded in the C source code In data files or text controls in dialog boxes however the double backslash is not necessary A Indicates that a regular expression or subexpression is anchored at the beginning of the input string For example ab matches ab and abc but not cab Recall that is treated differently in bracket expressions Indicates that a regular expression or subexpression is anchored at the end of the input string For example ab matches ab and cab but not abc Denotes alternation or the creation of a set of equally valid alternate expressions or subexpressions each of which can be matched For example ab cd matches ab or cd k Matches any code unit except for those which indicate the logical end of a line 350 RENESAS
257. nstruct matches between m and n occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 3 matches aa and aaa This construct can also be formed using m and m The first matches m or more occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa aaa aaaa and so on The second matches exactly m occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa and Create a bracket expression Bracket expressions create a set of items any of which may be matched For example abc matches a or b or c Within a bracket expression all regular expression special characters are treated as normal non special characters except specifies a range of character values based on their bit pattern For example A Za z matches all uppercase and lowercase English characters To indicate as a character in the bracket expression it must be the first or last character in the set for example a z or A Z is special only when placed in the first character position within the bracket set Using in the first position complements the set of items to be matched For example a z matches all characters except for lowercase English letters Finally in order to include a as a character in the bracket set you must include it as the first character in the set as in Jabc or A abc 349 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table C 1 Regular Expression Characters cont Character Mea
258. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
259. ntrol directory mappings Version Control Director Add c work application project x we swapp project1 c workapplication sre x we sw app srce Modify c work shared x we swishared Environment Cancel Export Import Figure 8 7 Version Control Setup Dialog Projects Tab gt To define a new mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab and the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button that is next to the Version control directory mappings list The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Enter the source i e working directory into the Source directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Enter the version control directory i e controlled directory into the Version control directory Yersion Control Directory Mapping 24 x Source directory fe work shared gt Con Version control directory x we swishared Figure 8 8 Version Control Directory Mapping Dialog 128 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To modify an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mappin
260. nts define new breakpoints and delete enable or disable breakpoints 320 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 11 Viewing Memory When the label name is specified the user can view the memory contents that the label has been registered in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to _main in word size e Select Memory from the CPU submenu of the View menu enter _main in the Begin edit box enter ff in the End edit box and set Word in the Format combo box Format Begin ma in Gancel End FF Format Word x2 Display Value As lunsigned short Bytes Gount For One Line 16 Byte Figure 6 13 Format Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Memory window showing the specified area of memory is displayed 321 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Value 28150 21766 3446 6400 6400 16454 28640 28512 65492 28640 4112 65496 256 65490 65490 19888 65488 3432 24064 65488 27009 256 4 256 3 256 1z 256 16 256 Figure 6 14 Memory Window 322 2ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 12 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch that the values of variables used in the user program are changed For example set a watch on the long type array a declared at the beginning of the program by using the following pro
261. nu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy _ Modify HeEmaoyve Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Add Modity Renove Figure 6 14 Customize Dialog Placeholder Tab gt To add a custom placeholder 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab figure 6 14 2 Choose whether you need to use an Application wide custom placeholder or Workspace wide custom placeholder Click Add on the adjacent button to the list you require 3 The dialog add New Custom Placeholder dialog is displayed figure 6 15 4 In the fields provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Then choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR 113 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Figure 6 15 New Custom Placeholder Dialog 6 9 Using the workspace and project log facilities The HEW 3 0 has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Tools customize dialog This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names
262. nvoked which allows you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click OK to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and then press F1 24 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 5 Build Configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration figure 2 14 This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on you can select that configuration and all of the options for all of the build phases will be restored These build configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform Figure 2 14 shows three build configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each of the phases compile and assemble are set to their standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each of the files are being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each of the files are being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default MyDebug MyOptimi
263. o load the debugging information file For details refer to section 4 3 1 Setting at Emulator Activation 191 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Notes 1 Ifthe user system interface cable is disconnected from the connector on the user system the following dialog box will appear dd Connector disconnected Please connect and press lt Enter gt key Figure 3 11 Connector disconnected Dialog Box 2 Ifthe emulator is not properly initialized one of the dialog boxes shown in figures 3 12 through 3 15 will appear a The following dialog box is displayed when the flash memory cannot be erased Exchange the MCU since the flash memory has been rewritten to more times than the limitation Flash memory erase error Change device Figure 3 12 Flash memory erase error Dialog Box b The following dialog box is displayed when the flash memory cannot be written to An incorrect system clock value has been input or the flash memory has been rewritten to more times than the limitation Figure 3 13 Error sending Flash memory write program Dialog Box 192 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual c The following dialog box is displayed when an incorrect ID code has been input For security the flash memory is completely erased Figure 3 14 ID code error Dialog Box d The following dialog box is displayed when the MCU cannot communicate with the emulator The MCU
264. oad module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 3 10 Generating a Makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile which can be used to build parts of your workspace without HEW This is particularly useful of you want to send a project to a user who does not have the HEW or if you want to version control an entire build including the make components gt To generate a makefile 1 Ensure that the project which you want to generate a makefile for is the current project 2 Ensure that the build configuration that you want to build the project with is the current configuration 3 Select Build gt Generate Makefile 4 Once this menu has been selected a dialog is displayed which asks the user what parts of the workspace need to be added to the make file See figure 3 23 5 Checking Scan dependencies whilst building makefile will force a dependency scan to ensure the make file creation is up to date 6 Select the radio button which is relevant for your makefile and then click OK Generate make file 2 xi For all configurations in the currently active project Cancel C For all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace IV Scan dependencies whilst building make file Figure 3 23 Generate makefi
265. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
266. oject Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select which group you would like to add this new extension 5 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list 21 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Cancel m File group Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file z C Extension belongs to a new group a Associated application Open Assembly source file a Figure 2 10 Add File Extension Dialog Existing Group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace then the appropriate application is launched with the file Figure 2 11 shows the association between a word processor and the extension DOC E Ipp C list file Text editor cpp C source file Cancel cpu CPU information file Word processor doc Documents Add E exp Expanded assembly source file Remove Librarian 0 lib Library file E lsl Library list file Open with sct Library section list file map Linkage map file E fsy Linkage symbol file No application t obj Object file 5 v n Pran
267. ol set up The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces gt To export a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Export button A standard file save dialog will be displayed Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 3 Enter the name of the file and then click OK 134 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To import a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Import button A standard file open dialog will be displayed Browse to the HVC file which you would like to import 3 Select the file and then click OK 135 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 136 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system At the time of writing the HEW can only attach to versions 5 and 6 of Visual SourceSafe The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a proje
268. olbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes gt To float the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar 1 2 4 The Workspace Window The Workspace window has three panes The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files figure 1 13 You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its corresponding icon Workspace ioj X dbsct c Demo c intprg c 2 lowsre c 4 resetprg c p vecttbl c Dependencies Navigation Tab Templates Tab Project Tab Projet Figure 1 13 Workspace Window Projects Tab The Navigation tab provides jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed Figure 1 14 shows ANSIC functions See chapter 2 Build Basics for more information on the Workspace window The Templates tab displays template settings See 4 12 Templates for more information about a template RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manu
269. om_e End address of the initialized data sect char ram_s Start address of the initialized data se DTBL J v sot fesetprg c gt dbscte Figure 4 1 Editor Window 63 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 Working with Multiple Files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu e Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each window visible e Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows in sequence horizontally so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows in sequence vertically so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the editor window e Window gt Close All Close all open editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files To show files in notebook
270. ommand for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 filel c If the get command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 x ve sw app project1 is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application projectl 2 FILE1 C is substituted for 7FILENAME 129 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Project File C work application projectl filel c Arguments VCDIR FILENAME 1 2 Command X vc sw app projectl filel c Figure 8 10 Example of Substitution 8 3 2 Specifying Environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog to view the current settings figure 8 7 To add a new environment variable click the Add button beside the Environment list the dialog shown in Figure will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment list Environment Yariable 2 xi Variable o Cancel Value cea Placeholder popup menu Figure 8 11 Environment Variable Dialog To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment
271. on 5 x Registered components Cancel 3 System Tools Call Walker ii Register H Series Librarian Interface nl Mapview 1 0 Uuras Utility Phases a Debugger Components Me Binary File Object Reader 1 0 Zune ElfDwarf2 object reader 2 0 ae Generic Cache View ECX 1 0 aetna Generic Coverage View ECX 1 0 Generic Event View ECX 1 0 Tenanan Generic Image View ECX 1 0 7 z ul T Show all components Current HEW tools database location EH ew Modify Figure 5 1 Tools Administration Dialog Example There are five standard types of component e Toolchain a set of build phases e g compiler assembler and linker These components provide the build capability e System Tool an application EXE which can be launched from the Tools menu They are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the Hitachi Debugging Interface HDI or an interactive graphical librarian e Utility Phase a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific e Debugger Component a component that supports some specific debugger functionality e g Target platform Object reader etc e Extension Component a component that provides key functionalit
272. on at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the Source window a step operation will step a single source line In the Disassembly window a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction e Stepping Into a Function If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function either click the Step In toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step In e Stepping Over a Function Call If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function either click the Step Over toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step Over e Stepping Out of a Function There are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function To step out of the current function either
273. on file extensions later in this chapter 16 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project Files can be individually removed from a project selections of files can be removed or all files can be removed gt To remove files from a project 1 Select Project gt Remove Files or select Remove Files from the Projects tab s pop up menu in the Workspace window see figure 2 5 The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed figure 2 6 Figure 2 5 Projects Tab Pop up Menu Remove Project Files c demo demo c hew demo demo resetprg stc c Shew demodemo sbrk c c hew demo demo stacksct stc e hew demo demo vecttbl src c Shew demo demo Figure 2 6 Remove Project Files Dialog 17 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Select the file or files which you want to remove from the Project files list 3 Click the Remove button to remove the selected files or click Remove All to remove all project files 4 Click OK to remove the files from the project gt To remove selected files from a project 1 Select the files which you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press the DEL key The files will be removed 18 RENESAS High performance Emb
274. onal documents Notes on Connecting the H8 xxxx Does not download emulator firmware The emulator s firmware is not downloaded Therefore when the emulator is activated the flash memory is not rewritten However be sure to enter the ID code specified above If an incorrect code is entered all the programs on the flash memory will be erased Writing Flash memory The user program is written to the flash memory Debugging the program is disabled To download the load module register it in the workspace 188 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 The Connecting dialog box is displayed and the emulator connection is started Connecting Figure 3 6 Connecting Dialog Box 8 The dialog box is displayed as shown in figure 3 7 Figure 3 7 Dialog Box of the Power on Request Message 9 Power on the user system 189 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 10 When using the H8 family microcomputer the dialog box shown in figure 3 8 is open Input the system clock value Figure 3 8 System Clock Dialog Box 11 After the following dialog box is displayed input the ID code When the emulator is activated in the E10T Emulator mode input the ID code to be set Figure 3 9 ID Code Dialog Box 190 2eENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 13 When Connected is displayed in the Output window of the HEW the emulator init
275. onment A laptop computer can be used as a host computer creating a debugging environment in any place e The emulator can be used to write to the internal flash memory 169 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 1 Warnings CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 For details on the emulator components refer to section 1 1 in the additional document Notes on Connecting the H8 xxxx 2 Never place heavy objects on the casing 3 Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses For details refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions 4 When moving the host computer or user system take care not to vibrate or damage it 5 After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use 6 Supply power to the connected equipment after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on 170 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 2 Environmental Conditions user program Observe the conditions listed in tables 1 1 and 1 2 when using the emulator Failure to do so will cause illegal operation in the user system the emulator product and the CAUTION Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifi
276. open or select it click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and then choose the Open lt file gt menu option where lt file gt is the name of the file selected 68 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 5 Closing Files gt To close individual files select one of the following methods 1 Double click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized 2 Click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized and select the Close menu option 3 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 4 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select File gt Close 5 Click on the close button located at the top right of each window when not maximized gt To close all windows at once Select Window gt Close All 69 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 Editing a File The High performance Embedded Workshop editor supports standard editing functionality This is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu or local menu that is local to each editor window To invoke it place the pointer in an open window and click the right mouse button Table 4 1 outlines the basic operations that are provided by the edito
277. or Publication Date Rev 1 00 July 02 2003 Rev 2 00 July 26 2004 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Technical Documentation amp Information Department Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co Ltd 2004 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan Renesas Technology Corp Sales Strategic Planning Div Nippon Bldg 2 6 2 Ohte machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES http www renesas com CENESAS Renesas Technology America Inc 450 Holger Way San Jose CA 95134 1368 U S A Tel lt 1 gt 408 382 7500 Fax lt 1 gt 408 382 7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH United Kingdom Tel lt 44 gt 1628 585 100 Fax lt 44 gt 1628 585 900 Renesas Technology Europe GmbH Dornacher Str 3 D 85622 Feldkirchen Germany Tel lt 49 gt 89 380 70 0 Fax lt 49 gt 89 929 30 11 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd 7 F North Tower World Finance Centre Harbour City Canton Road Hong Kong Tel lt 852 gt 2265 6688 Fax lt 852 gt 2375 6836 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co Ltd FL 10 99 Fu Hsing N Rd Taipei Taiwan Tel lt 886 gt 2 2715 2888 Fax lt 886 gt 2 2713 2999 Renesas Technology Shanghai Co Ltd 26 F Ruijin Building No 205 Maoming Road S Shanghai 200020 China Tel lt 86 gt 21 6472 1001 Fax lt 86 gt 21 6415
278. or of the emulator 3 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector in the user system 4 Select Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop gt High performance Embedded Workshop from Programs in the Start menu LR Accessories Ls Startup LE Administrative Tools Common igh performance Embedded W o LS Tools E Command Prompt Bes High per for mance Embedded Workshop Internet Explorer 3 High performance Embedded Workshop Help Qy Windows NT Explorer 2 High per for mance Embedded Workshop Read Me Documents E Settings A Erd ix Run Windows NT Workstation Shut Down Figure 3 2 Start Menu Note The Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop gt Tools is not displayed depending on the user s environment 185 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Welcome OK Cancel Open a recent project workspace Administration ia Ez Browse to another project workspace Figure 3 3 Welcome Dialog Box Create a new project workspace radio button Creates a new workspace Open a recent project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace and displays the history of the opened workspace Browse to another project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace this radio button is used when the history of the opened workspace does not remain To use a workspace for
279. or that phase select it The dialog that will be invoked depends upon whether the custom phase selected was a multiple or single phase according to the selection of phase type in figure 3 3b 49 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Phase Options gizi Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files hewtest 4 Command Ey C source file p _hew files Dostwindows executables CMDLINE EXE E hewtest c initsct c Options intprg c intoa FULLFI BRE FULLFILE vecttbl c 0 Default Options E hewtest1 hevwtest2 E hewtest3 5 C source file Placeholder hewtest3 c initsct c I Fie path name x Insert intprg c Z sbrk c me ja Figure 3 10 Custom Options Dialog The dialog in figure 3 10 is a custom phase options dialog The implementation of which is slightly different depending on whether you are using a multiple or single shot phase On the left hand side is the project and file list It is possible to select multiple projects and files in the same way as Windows explorer to modify the options for more than one selection On the right hand side are the 3 options tabs This is where you set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configuration information is being viewed from the configuration list on the upper left of the dialog box Each configuration is listed along
280. orced Breaking of Program Executions The HEW can force a break in the execution of a program e Cancel all breaks e To execute the remaining sections of the main function select Go from the Debug menu or the Go button on the toolbar Figure 6 26 Go Button e The program goes into an endless loop To force a break in execution select Halt from the Debug menu or the Halt button on the toolbar Figure 6 27 Halt Button 330 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 15 Displaying Local Variables The user can display local variables in a function using the Locals window For example we will examine the local variables in the main function which declares four local variables a J i and p_sam e Select Locals from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Locals window is displayed The Locals window shows the local variables in the function currently pointed to by the program counter along with their values Note however that the Locals window is initially empty because local variables are yet to be declared iaicee ilonel 0l HO0000ff6 Oxffda lone H000a Oxff48 int Oxfbd8 Oxff46 class Sample Figure 6 28 Locals Window e Click mark at the left side of array a in the Locals window to display the elements e When the user refers to the elements of array a before and after the execution of the sort function it is clarifi
281. ore each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input file or files were last modified If not the phase is not executed for the files Options Output Files Dependent Files CONFIGDIAIFile5 ob CONFIGDIR File6 obj CONFIGDIR File obj CONFIGDIR Filed obj Modify c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File1 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File2 obj Remove c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File3 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File4 obj dd i Figure 3 14 Dependent Files Tab in Custom Options 53 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To add a dependent file 1 Click Add The Add Dependent File dialog will be invoked figure 3 15 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu oo O Browse Cancel Figure 3 15 Add Dependent File Dialog gt To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Dependent File dialog which is the same as figure 3 15 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified ent
282. ory fill function To fill a memory range with the same value choose Fill from the popup menu of the Memory window or choose Fill from the Memory drop down menu The Fill Memory dialog box is shown in figure 5 18 Fill Memory Gancel H oooo0000 Data H 00 Format Byte amp 1 x Verity Figure 5 18 Fill Memory Dialog Box If an address range has been selected in the Memory window the specified start and end addresses will be displayed Select a format from the Format combo box and enter the data value in the Data field On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the memory range 251 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 9 Copying a Memory Area You can copy a memory area using the memory copy function Select a memory range and then Copy from the popup menu The Copy Memory dialog box is opened figure 5 19 Copy Memory Cancel H 00000000 Destination H o0000000 Format Byte amp 1 x Verify Figure 5 19 Copy Memory Dialog Box The source start and end addresses selected in the Memory window will be displayed in the Begin and End fields Checking the Verify check box enables copying while comparing the copy source and copy destination The copy unit can be selected in the Format combo box Enter the destination start address in the Destination
283. own in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button 3 Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog figure 6 6 and then click OK ModifyT ool MEI Cancel Command EINDIR explorer exe gt Browse Arguments jc t L LDL Initial directory siTEMPOIR gt Browse Figure 6 6 Modify Tool Dialog gt To remove a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button 105 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 3 Configuring the Help System The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the editor window In other words if you select some text in the editor window and then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files which will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Customize dialog gt To add anew help file 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Help tab see figure 6 7 Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Help f
284. oyouiedsvtdusseanpevaetstessensdavyou EEE EE E EE E 175 2 3 Break FUNCUONS csi ck ieesei nid ties ee aie 175 2A Memory Access FUnCtIONS sessios eener oeer e ee a EOS EEEE E REEN RA 176 2 3 Stack Trac FUNCHON ccesccesdesiesssei scecsnpsoeesstes devensvardestdabecesiesicbsaetieesvoesdeessvesobesenssoiasesevieerseess 177 iG Onlite el p ssceeicssicesceduebasacdacds cectgedeecsuaesoecsnawbenaelaets chetgevenssnesceneeasasdaeds cdesgevebsstovsueevetebenaets 177 Section 3 Preparation before Use ics ccccccipsdacdernecatiiasalii testa oeceeeeeteceenaes 179 3 1 Emulator Preparation 00 0 eceeccecesecesecesecsseceecaeecaeeeaeseaeseeeseeeseesseeeseeaecsecsseeeaessaeeeaes 179 3 2 Emulator Installationen nesine ea e i Ei 180 3 2 1 Installing under Windows 98 or Windows Me Operating System 180 3 2 2 Installing under Windows NT 4 0 Operating System c ccccsssssscesssesseeseeeesees 181 3 2 3 Installing under Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating System 182 3 3 Connecting the Emulator to the Host Computer oo eee eceeeceesceesceseceseeseeeecsseesaeenaes 183 vii 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 4 Connecting the Emulator to the User System 0 eee cee cseecneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseens 184 Bed SYSlEM CHECK ica scksiicnccsabivesssaiseccsusederssnensssgahgevess nese fobevcns jolneteacevsorsbeessndeutenbesabecduersedevoeds 185 3 6 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software
285. ponents yourself 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly gt To search for components 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 The Search Disk for Components dialog will be displayed figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components 2 xi Select the directory in which to begin the search EHew Browse IV Include subfolders Located components Version HRF Location Register 1 0 C Hew Too Component Genetic Watch View ECX ik HEP Generic Waveform View ECX 1 0 C Hew Too Register All Binary File Object Reader 1 0 C Hew Too ElfOwarf2 object reader 2 0 C Hew Too cal Intel Hex Record Object Reader 1 0 C Hew Too SRecord object reader 1 0 C Hew Too H8S H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform 3 0 C Hew Too gt Search Status 50 file s found Figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Dialog 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search Du
286. pop up menu of available placeholders figure 8 6 An explanation of each placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders User login name User login password Version control directory Comment File path name Filename File leaf File extension File directory Configuration directory Project directory Workspace directory Temp directory Command directory Windows directory Windows system directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Figure 8 6 Arguments Field Placeholder Pop up Menu 126 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders Placeholder Value and How its Determined User login name Current user login General tab User login password Current user password General tab Version control directory Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment Comment specified before command execution File path name Full path and name of file involved in operation Filename Filename including extension of file involved File leaf Filename excluding extension of file involved File extension Extension of file involved in operation File directory Directory of file involved in operation Configuration directory Current configuration directory Project directory Current project directory Workspace directory Current workspac
287. pressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to appendix B Regular Expressions for further information If you clicked Find Next the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click Replace if you want to replace it Click Replace All to replace all occurrences or click Cancel to stop the replace action If you select Selection in Replace In selected range of the text is replaced If you select whole file the whole files are replaced If you select all open files all files that are currently open in the editor have the replace operation carried out on them Jumping to a Specified Line gt To jump to a line in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Goto Line press CTRL G or select Goto Line from the editor window s local menu A goto line dialog box will be displayed figure 4 5 3 Enter into the dialog box the number of the line that you want to go to and then click OK 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified Goto RES Line number fi cows Figure 4 5 Goto Dialog 4 6 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its
288. ption to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 124 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands Commands are defined when the Add or Modify buttons are clicked on the dialogs shown in figure 8 3 and figure 7 4 In either case the dialog shown in figure 8 5 is invoked Add Command 21 xi Command Version control executable VAWSS WINSA Ss exe Browse a Arguments History CDIR FILENAME Y USERNAME PASS gt Initial directory SFILEDIF P Browse m Executable return code di Retum code of executable is not meaningful Command has failed if the return code is In ot Equal To Z fp Figure 8 5 Add Modify Command Dialog To define a command 1 Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 2 Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 3 Enter the initial directory in which you would like to run the executable from into the Initial directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder i e execute the command from the same directory
289. pup menu The Search Memory dialog box shown in figure 5 17 is displayed Search Memory Begin a H 00001000 ae Cancel End Hooor FFF Data e Search Data As Byte x1 MS M Search Equal Data I Search Backward Figure 5 17 Search Memory Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the range in which to search and the data value to search for and select the search format If pattern search is selected as the search format a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Search conditions other than pattern search are data match mismatch and search direction Note that only data match and forward direction can be selected with pattern search Click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the HEW searches the range for the specified data If the data is found it is highlighted If the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found is displayed If Search Next is selected from the popup menu in the state where data has been found the search will be restarted from the next address 250 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value A value can be set as the content of a memory address range using the mem
290. r Table 4 1 Basic Editing Operations Operation Effect Action Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Click the cut toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut local menu Press CTRL X Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Click the copy toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy local menu Press CTRL C Paste Copies the contents of the Windows Click the paste toolbar button clipboard into the active window at the Select Edit gt Paste position of the insertion cursor Select Paste local menu Press CTRL V Delete Removes highlighted text it is not copied to Select Edit gt Clear the Windows clipboard Select Clear local menu Press Delete Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of Select Edit gt Select All the active window Select Select All local menu Undo Reverses the last editing operation Select Edit gt Undo Select Undo local menu Press CTRL Z Redo Repeats the last undone editing operation Select Edit gt Redo Select Redo local menu Press CTRL Y 70 RENESAS 4 5 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Searching and Navigating through Files The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides find replace and file navigation functionality The following three sections detail how to use these features 4 5 1 Finding Text gt To search for text in th
291. r E o Era EE PEE sates tevesashazstedietesassctavensde4 79 Template Sorene nea a E EER O EEEE E EE EEE RENEE ERRE 82 4 12 1 Defining a Template cic cicsiccesccusesasccvseveaccisevestcueesen cstvsscdaadesdeusneaescbunevsdestesndese 82 4 12 2 Deleting a Templates icc testesnavesacesscsiscwescesatestertncsssatdsbictniwessasedgatebtous EAEE 84 4 12 3 Inserting a Template csiis idroiessecissisrosesuisisissdnrireesi tio dopo ceateosts isi sreses asisas 84 4 124 Brace Matching s sciccicisceasihiecesschtveastcdectvaccisevecdsueeses eE N E ENEA Ei 85 Editor Column management eccecceeeeseeceeseeseceeceseeeseesecesecaecsaecsaecaeecaeesaecseeeaeeenes 86 Tools AdministratlOi seissioun eeina aa aE Eae 89 Tool Location Ssss roseis dood cesdcnscessheeee suleeveasstaevandsnensea ENE TOENE EE ERRETEN EREE 90 HEW Registration Files HRE sessie riisci aiiis 90 Registering Components cess secisccitesascts setshceststantedegssdestesdecvesssendvenstenvserscesasite eapisnezoiadene 91 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components 000 000 eee cee eseeeeecneeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 91 5 3 2 Registering a Single COMPONEeNt eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaes 92 Unregistering Components iseis orione nner e nro aE EE TEE Ehe EEEE Esenin 92 Viewing and Editing Component Properties seseseeessereesssreesreresrerissrrresrrrreserersreresee 93 Uninstalling Component sic0 cccscscsccssessnsssenscivvenssensdeeusevescsteesebssteote
292. r configuration or delete a configuration These three tasks are described below gt To add a new configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog will be invoked figure 2 17 26 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add Configuration x Configuration name M yConfig Cancel Based on configuration Debug x __Cancel Configuration directory c hew demoldemo MyConfig Figure 2 17 Add Configuration Dialog 3 Enter the new configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of existing configurations from which you want to copy a configuration out of the drop down list of the Based on configuration field Click OK on both dialogs to create the new configuration gt To remove a configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Select the configuration that you want to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Click OK to close the Build Configurations dialog 27 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 Building a Project The outline of the build proc
293. r in this chapter for further information Close the Add Menu Option dialog by clicking OK 6 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK n Add Menu Option Option 0 MyOption Cancel Commands bee Modify Remove Moye up isrado Move down Figure 8 4 Add Menu Option Dialog 123 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To remove an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and then click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To modify an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button beside the list The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed The title of the dialog is Modify Menu Option 3 Modify the commands as necessary and then click OK 4 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu o
294. r the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually 4 12 1 Defining a Template gt To define a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click on the define template toolbar button ile The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Click Add A dialog is displayed that asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 3 Ifyou want to modify an existing template use the Template name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify 4 Enter the desired text into the Template text text area You can copy text from another editor window and then paste it into this dialog using CTRL V 5 There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop list at the bottom of the edit template dialog These range from CTRL 0 to CTRL 9 6 Enter the following keywords to insert special information when
295. racassad source fila Fa b Figure 2 11 File Groups and Applications To associate an application with a file group 22 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 Select the file group to be associated from the File Extensions dialog figure 2 11 2 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 12 Modify File Extension Group Bee ee Linkage map file m Associated application Cancel Open Linkage map file with None 7 Editor Other Windows default Madii Figure 2 12 Modify File Extension Dialog 3 Select None to remove any association select Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other if you want to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other then you can select from any previously defined application from the drop down list or specify a new application 4 Click Add to define a new application The Add Application dialog will be displayed figure 2 13 Add Application 2 xi None Cancel Command excluding parameters gt Browse Parameters 2 Initial directory O Figure 2 13 Add Application Dialog 5 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field
296. rformance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 4 Setting the Configuration Dialog Box e Select Emulator then Systems from the Options menu for the basic settings of the emulator The Configuration dialog box is displayed Configuration X General l Device Emulation mode Normal z Step option Disables interrupts during single step execution 7 NMI signal Emulator C User User interface 25MHz clock Breakcondition Emulator C User mode z _ Elash memory Disable O OC synchronization Apply Figure 6 1 Configuration Dialog Box Note The items that can be set in this dialog box differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help 310 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Set options as follows Table 6 1 General Page Options Option Device H8 xxxx default Value Emulation mode Normal normal execution default Step option Disables interrupts during single step execution Disables interrupts during single step execution default NMI signal Emulator default User interface clock According to the system clock frequency the maximum user interface clock is automatically set Break condition mode Emulator default Flash memory synchronization Disable default Note Options NMI signal and Break condition mode are not included in the SuperLowPo
297. rformance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix B Troubleshooting I have clicked the Stop Build button or selected Build gt Stop Build to abort a build but the build process has not stopped The HEW will stop the build after it has built the current file or executed the current single phase If the builder does not respond after a longer period of time you can select Build gt Terminate Current Tool which will attempt to forcibly terminate the current process Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again I have a text file open in the editor but syntactic color coding is not being displayed Ensure that you have named the file i e saved it and that the Syntax coloring check box is set on the Editor tab of the Options dialog box which is launched via Tools gt Options The HEW looks up the filename extension to determine the group to which the file belongs and decides whether or not coloring should be applied to the file To view the currently defined filename extensions and file groups select Project gt File Extensions to launch the File Extensions dialog box To view the coloring information select Tools gt Format to display the Color tab of the Format dialog box for further details see the Syntax Coloring section in Chapter 4
298. ring the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located components list Select a component and click Register to register an individual component or click Register All to register all located components 6 Click Close to exit the dialog 91 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 2 Registering a Single Component The HEW allows you to navigate directly to a single component in order to register it The HEW Registration File HRF is located in the root directory of a component s installation gt To register a component 1 Click the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog A standard file open dialog will be launched with its file filter set to HEW Registration Files hrf 2 Navigate to the HRF file of the component you would like to register select it and then click Select 3 A dialog will be invoked which displays information regarding the selected tool Click Register to confirm that you want to register the tool or click Close to abort the operation 5 4 Unregistering Components The components which are registered with the HEW affect the way in which it behaves For example every compatible system tool which is registered will be added to the tools menu when a new project is created Someti
299. rkspace name it needs not be entered Other list boxes are used for setting the toolchain the fixed information is displayed when the toolchain has not been installed 202 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 The following dialog box is displayed New Project Step 7 c E10T SYSTEM Figure 4 5 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box Check H8 xxxx E10T SYSTEM and click the Next button 203 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator Configuration name Debug H8 oo _E10T SYSTEM Detail options Modi Hers Finish Cancel Figure 4 6 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box This is the end of the emulator setting Click the Finish button to exit the Project Generator The HEW is activated 5 After the HEW has been activated the emulator is automatically connected For operation during connection refer to section 3 5 System Check 204 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 2 Creating the New Workspace Toolchain Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button Welcome Figure 4 7 Welcome Dialog Box 205 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 The Project Generator is
300. rmance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 141 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Configure To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for file status check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 142 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 10 Network Facilities 10 1 Overview The High performance Embedded Workshop version 3 is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system is implemented by making one of the machines attached to the network the server machine All other cl
301. rom the Debug menu or click the Disconnect toolbar button 2 Exiting the HEW Select Exit from the File menu A message box may be displayed If necessary click the Yes button to save a session After saving a session the HEW exits If not necessary click the No button to exit the HEW IN Session has been modified do you want to save it No Cancel Figure 4 34 Message Box 230 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section5 Debugging This section describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes 5 1 Setting the Environment for Emulation 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box Selecting Options gt Emulator gt System or clicking the Emulator System toolbar button E opens the Configuration dialog box 5 1 2 General Page Sets the emulator operation conditions Configuration X General Device Emulation mode Normal Step option Disables interrupts during single step execution x NMI signal Emulator C User User interface 2 5MHez clock Breakcondition tf Emulator C User mode Elash memory Disable g synchronization Cancel Apply Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 231 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Items that can be displayed in the sheet are listed below Device combo box Emulation mode combo box Step op
302. rompt before saving workspace IV Prompt before saving session Default directory for new workspaces e Hew Browse Figure 6 9 Options Dialog Workspace Tab The following sections explain the options available on this tab 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up Set this check box if you would like the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically open the last workspace you opened when it is launched 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores which files were open When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you 107 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when you open a workspace then set this check box 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what was contained within each workspace To help resolve this the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace gt To enter a workspace description 1 Select the workspace icon from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The dialog shown in figure
303. rreererieresrreresrertnsrnriesrsrreresreet 109 6 4 6 Default directory for new workspaces sseeseeseseeessesesreessserrresrrrrerrsrrerrsrerrsee 109 6 4 7 Prompt before saving SCSSION 00 0 eee eeceseceecesecesecesecaecsaecaeecaeetaeceeseeeaeeeneeees 109 Using an External Editor oo eee csecseeeeeeeeeeseceeceesecesecsaecsaecsaecsaesaecsaecaaesaeesaeseneeags 110 Customizing File Sayssac stave iin ER N NEE EENE EAEE E Geeta ass 111 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools cece ee eeeeesecssecsseceecaeesaeceeceeeaeeeneeees 111 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files eee eeceeeceseceeceseceaecsaecaeecseeeaeseaesaeesaeseneeees 111 Using an External Debugger ci i cciscsescesesdsnsbeeesenesons sonvacescesseestionsensssescensetvesaned stvessesens 112 Using Custom Placeholder cece cececsceeeeeeseeeeeeeceerceeceeeeeeeeceseceaecaecsaessaeseesaeeeaeeegs 113 Using the workspace and project log facilities eee ee eeseessecse cess cneeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 114 VErSION CONTO sscssnccantavanstdencnaengyansesanvarnansiieutntasiobesterasisescaatyaaeantvnnssaanvades 115 Selecting a Version Control System ssesssseesssrseresrsresrerrerestesresresreserrsentnserrrererreeresre 116 Using the Custom Version Control System seseeeseeeseeeseesrresrrrrerresrerssees 119 Defining Version Control Menu Options ccceeceesseesceseceseeseceseceaecsaecsaeeseeceeeaeeeneeees 119 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons ee ee eee cess ceseceaecese
304. rted in H8C C compiler V4 0 or later Ox00002070 0x00002080 Ox00002066 0x0000208c Ox00002096 0x000020a8 Ox000020ha Ox000020e2 Ox000020f6 Ox0000211a 0x00002136 Ox00002154 0x00002186 NxNANAN 1 re Double click the Editor column in the sort function and set a PC breakpoint void Sample sort long a long t int ls Ja Ke gap gap 5 while gap gt 0 or k 0 k lt gap k for izktgap i lt 10 izitgap for j i gap i gt k j j gap if ali Dabisea t a j ati alj gap aLjt gap t else break gap gap 2 Figure 6 39 Source Window PC Breakpoint Setting 342 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Set the same program counter value PC H 400 as was set in section 6 8 Setting Registers again use the Register window Click the Go button e After the break in program execution select Stack Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu to open the Stack Trace window w Stack Trace Kind Nane Value Sample sort 0x20ba tutorial Ox10c4 main 0x1046 PowerON_Resei 0x0420 Figure 6 40 Stack Trace Window Figure 6 40 shows that the position of the program counter is currently at the selected line of the sort function and that the sort function is called from the tutorial function 343 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 20 What Next This
305. rving all of the network workspaces 148 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 11 Difference View The High performance Embedded Workshop now has an integrated difference view This view allows detailed difference comparisons to be made with local files on the drive and also with files in the version control system In the HEW version 3 onwards the Visual SourceSafe component has this facility The difference window can be invoked two ways The first is from the show differences menu item on the tools menu The second is via the workspace window pop up with the same name When using the pop up menu the current file selection is automatically added to the edit box Clicking the show differences menu item displays the dialog shown below in figure 11 1 stabs c hew projects mpproject myproject dbsct c File in version control u u 4 3g as 16 16 1 pragma section DSEC 1 static const struct 1 pragma section DSEC 18 static const struct 19 char rom_s Start address of tk char rom_s Start address of the 20 char rom_e End address of the 7 char rom_e End address of the in an char ram_s Start address of tk char ram_s Start address of the 22 Si alee a DTBL a _sectop D _ secend D __sectop 3 __sectop D _ secend D sectop R aff __sectop ABS8D _ secend ABS8D __sectop ABS8D __ secend ABS8D _ aff __sectop ABS16
306. ry back to the list gt To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 54 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 5 File Mappings By default the files input to a phase are only taken from the project i e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog figure 3 3b If you would like a phase to take files output from a previous phase i e intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 16 Build Phases Assembler Object file Compiler Object file Figure 3 16 Build Phases Dialog File Mappings Tab 55 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual A file mapping states that you would like the HEW to pass output files of a certain type produced by one phase referred to as the source phase to another phase referred to as the destination phase Such intermediate files are passed in addition to the project files gt To add a file mapping 1 Click Add The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 2 Select the file group which you want to pass between the phases from the File group drop down list box 3 Select the source phase i e which phase generates the files from the Source phase drop
307. s Format Views 1 21 xi Source All D Selected Text D Text E Assembly include file Assembly list file E Assembly source file C header file C list file E C source file E C header file n 3 n n s C list file n n n n n E C source file Expanded assembly E Hex file Library information file Linkage map file Linkage symbol file x gt E HEW Sample Text cres Hemove Figure 4 10 Format Views Dialog Font Tab 4 11 Syntax Coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings i e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for a C source files text files map files or even your own files 79 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To change existing colors 1 2 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the item underneath the icon in the tree you wish to modify the colour for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre
308. s modified during user program execution the following message is displayed when the user program stops BREAKPOINT IS DELETED A xxxxxxxx If the above message is displayed cancel all BREAKPOINT settings with the Delete All or Disable button in the Breakpoints window Number of BREAKPOINT and Stop At Settings in the Run Menu The maximum number of BREAKPOINTs and Stop At settings allowed in the Run menu is 255 Therefore when 255 BREAKPOINTS are set specification by Stop At in the Run menu becomes invalid Use the BREAKPOINTS and Stop At in the Run menu with 255 or less total settings Note on RUN TIME Display The execution time of the user program displayed in the Status window is not a correct value since the timer in the host computer has been used Note on Displaying Timeout error If Timeout error is displayed the emulator cannot communicate with the target microcomputer Turn off the emulator and the user system and connect the emulator again by using the HEW Support of Double Float Format In the following memory operations the double float format is not supported Fill Memory dialog box Search Memory dialog box MEMORY_FILL command The Format specification in the Copy Memory dialog box is ignored Memory is copied in a byte unit 16 Note on Using the Run Program Dialog Box When Run is selected from the Debug menu to specify the stop address there
309. s whether display is on all or part of the screen The image is displayed on the whole screen The image is displayed on part of the screen 301 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Start Position Top Display of data starts at the upper left position Bottom Display of data starts at the lower left position Position Specifies the position on the screen from which image display is to start valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X coordinate of the start position unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Y Position Specifies the Y coordinate of the start location unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Width Height Size Specifies the height and width of an image to be displayed on part of the screen Width Pixel Specifies the width of the display unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Height Pixel Specifies the height of the display unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image window Even after the Image window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup menu 302 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual fa Image
310. sccesannves scents ratere esii Ees Generating a Makefile oo eee cseeeseeeeeeseeeseceeeeesecseceeeseeeseceaecsaecnaesaaesaeesaeeeneeegs Using the TEI ss catssaincans sosaicaietsainaca enaaa cai dauncana sass guecaanspvtaceqatyasnerxtnseaenne The Editor Window ccssccsssccescecsssceecsecessecsaecesseecneeesceecsaeceaeecnecesceecsaecesaeesseeeeeeesns Working with Multiple Files 2 0 0 0 eeseeecesseeceeeceeeceeeeecsaeceaeeceeeeseneeceaeecaeeeeeeesnaeeeneeees 421 ThetEditor ToolbaiS sagnene EE vee anes 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons issiria eetere eis eE ea i sek EEEE Ea KEES Enas 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons sssesseseesseeseeesrsseeresrrrrsreereserrrssestesresrentssrerreserreeresrentse 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons cesceeececsseceeececseceseeceeeeeeaeeceaeeesaeeceereseneeeeneees 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons esseceeecseeeseeeeecaeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeerenseenseerenes Standard File Operations i ssscsssssseivetssensseieecscdstacwsnstendesteg ieee nea ea ea Er as Ea E E KEES 43 1 Cr ating a New File ces ccscccsccssectscgscccsssssedegessstesseescbsecesoenscnsscepteqavestucesssstaerseeesoets 43 2 Saving a PU sscsncccccsce sghsshs Giesvesgsnpesesseheseeg ioascbaeschaedesdevsetes EEE EEEE ETENEE 4 3 3 Saying all Files seis seis Soe ea nee eS 434 Opening a Filer a e E E E E RE 43 3 Closing FileSssisincseinssese nenese asins eneee E Eei Eo aa ICE EEE Editing a Piles cities ec N A cee 40 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9
311. se Delete from the popup menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request 2 Are you sure you want to delete the label _main T Don t ask this question again Figure 5 29 Message Box for Confirming Label Deletion If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box 5 8 5 Deleting All Labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the popup menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request 2 Are you sure you want to delete all labels I Don t ask this question again Figure 5 30 Message Box for Confirming All Label Deletion If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box 262 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 6 Loading Labels from a File A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the popup menu to open the Open dialog box Open EES Look in a Debug H8 e0 _E1 0T SYSTEM gt e amp c Ea a demo sym meme Files of type SER tece ese steal EA ae Figure 5 31 Open Dialog Box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows Open dialog box se
312. se find in files refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor The Version Control tab displays the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control refer to chapter 7 Version Control 1 2 7 The Status Bar The status bar displays information as to the current state of the HEW Figure 1 19 shows the seven sections of the status bar Displays HEW status messages pay 3 Read only status Line number Column number Insertion Mode Ready Read write 2i 1 INS h d Read 2 al Caps lock Num lock Figure 1 19 Status Bar 1 3 The Help System The help menu is the rightmost menu on the HEW menu bar It contains the menu option Contents which when selected takes you to the main HEW help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click on the context sensitive help button which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog box as shown in figure 1 20 Context sensitive help M Cancel button Figure 1 20 Help Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog box that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control that you require help for and then press the F1 key 11 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1
313. seeee cee eects ceseceaeeeenseenaees 241 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window cece cece eseeeeeeseeeeeeeeetaeeeaeeneeeaees 241 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File eee ee ceeceseceseesecesecesecaecsaeceeeeeeaeseaeeneeeees 242 5 3 3 Executing Command File is cccc siccssecsscsentsocnctoteatacnassesseesseteccvsontsstaginanevsceetesbece 242 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution 0 ee cece eeceesceseceecssecssecsaesaecnaessaeseeseeeneeegs 242 5 3 3 Specifying a Log Pile vs isiics icvdesesscvsctesschureeacebsbbesccdacusedsvgevsosshessonsvensdcbeatesdevseesets 243 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging esessseeesseresssrrerserereseerissrerssterrsseetesrerreseersrerrees 243 3 3 7 Entering a Full Path to the Pile cc csesesscccsessstsesaiocssesseevonsvenessisceesbedecteeseees 243 5 3 8 Pasting a Placeholder sicccs scusessaservescsuseessensbesscctsedvtectseveossuessct ghvosnedshaedenseneees 244 54 eooking at REG1Sters r se es 244 viii 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window 00 eee eee eecesecesecesecnseceecaeeeaeeeseeeeeeaeeeaeeees 244 5 42 Expanding a Bit REGister issi scc cisssarcovsctitdevesssaceceasonsscnsiolievoacedsneesscesnceateniensts 245 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents eee eceecesecesecesecesecseecseecaecaesaaecseeeaeeeaeeegs 245 DAA Using Repister COME nts 5 i5 cc ccsccchesstecesasessgssdesbettecvenssendvobstenisevsdasvendaoveus
314. seneipnscensseuscessdposcensensecnstnuss 3 1 2 The Main Window ssccssecsscessecncesocesetesevssbessssessesgehducescesiegvteie sass E REPTE ERIE aiaia 4 12 1 Th Title Batt rrcnceeei teenei r een EEEE Ea EEE E E EEE REE 4 1 22 TRE Men Batt svstes sevscsestestects oveseusnczetstanteessussdsa ise eae eR pei Ea EEE Ei 4 1 2 3 Th WOOD ats ccsa eeose e en EERE EE E EEROR EEES 5 1 2 4 The Workspace Window sessseeeseseeeseeerestereeesessressresrrsetnrtrnsernstresrrnsrrsseneeenees 7 125 The Editor WINdOWssenrorena ann aE n E E 9 1 2 6 ThE O tp t WAN OW sisstin eresas e e EEE EE aE R 10 1 2 7 Whe Stat s Babi ss 12 5 2 ficesspscksaethsedovesseedssscaddeestogaceupectigaveesderssnesobeserdsqsadeseatereeess 11 13 The Help Systemene rea enra sonun E EE E aeea AEE EE SE desvaevebsstesue benseenngels 11 14 Eaunchins the HEW sneri eii oanet aean A A EEA AE EAS 12 AS Exiting the HEW cvcssssecasischvssastezste bance aeo ni e a Re Ea aE E EE 12 1 6 Component System Overview essseesseeseestsreeresrterssrerisstrtestesreetssetrisserresenrssenrrnesreet 12 De Build Basits oo ioesccs estate tecgecicheticeac ieszeceistasaccaresscecdenaeaneoreisaeneaeteeas 13 2A Th Build Process ireren randen aeee e E AEE ee EEEE EEEE E VOE EEEE ES 13 22 PHOJECL PILES deiars een eetset eE Eaa a i E E Eae SEE ERS EEEE SEES tans 14 2 2 1 Adding Files to a Project oseresseserseesesssrsrerensiverrrerersevserrererreesteesrssve essere rre
315. ser s Manual 6 18 Trace Functions The emulator has a branch instruction trace function The branch source addresses mnemonics operands source lines and labels are displayed for four branches 6 18 1 Displaying the Trace Window Select Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu Run the program as shown in the example of section 6 16 1 PC Break Function The trace results are displayed in the Trace window after the program execution is completed w Trace Window PTR Type Address Instruction Source Label 000003 BRANCH 0000223A BLT H 2200 8 000002 BRANCH 0000223A BLT H 2200 8 000001 BRANCH 00002235C BRA GH 223E 8 000000 BRANCH 00002248 RTS Figure 6 38 Trace Window If necessary adjust the column widths by dragging borders in the header bar immediately below the title bar Note The number of branch instructions that can be acquired by a trace and the trace display differ depending on the product For the specification of each product refer to the online help 341 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 19 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the information on the stack to display the names of functions in the sequence of calls that led to the function to which the program counter is currently pointing Note This function can be used only when the load module that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded Such load modules are suppo
316. shop User s Manual 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface Use the Command Line window to enter text based commands instead of window menus and commands 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button d to open the Command Line window Command Line gt Figure 5 8 Command Line Window This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands A series of predefined command lines can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt gt on the last line For information on the available commands refer to the on line help If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons Pressing the Ctrl T or Ctrl J keys on the last line displays the command line previously executed In this window HEW and TCL commands can be entered 241 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension for command file names is hdc Choose Set Batch File from the popup menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which
317. sion dialog shown in Figure To invoke the dialog select Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Choose one of the versions from the Available versions drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain Version 24 x Toolchain name Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Current version 6 0 0 0 Cancel Available versions 50 2 0 v H85 H87300 Assembler H8S H8 300 C C Compiler 4 0 04 H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator 1 0 02 OptLinker 7 1 07 Figure 3 20 Change Toolchain Version Dialog To show information of toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phases list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog and click the Information button Then a tool information dialog figure 3 21 will show you the information of the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Information xi Information High performance Embedded Workshop H8S H8 300 SERIES C C Compiler Ver 4 0 04 c 1994 1996 1997 1999 Renesas Technology Corp Figure 3 21 Toolchain Information Dialog 59 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 9 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu as described in chapter 6 Customizing the Environment
318. splay 304 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 17 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as waveforms in the Waveform View window 5 17 1 Opening the Waveform View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button EB to open the Waveform Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 57 Waveform Properties Data Address F o0000000 i E Data Size bit x Cancel m Channel Mono C Stereo Buffer Size F o0000000 v Figure 5 57 Waveform Properties Dialog Box Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8Bit or 16Bit Channel Specifies Mono or Stereo Buffer Size Specifies the buffer size of data displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform View window Even after the Waveform View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup menu 305 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual fad Waveform View Figure 5 58 Waveform View Window Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis shows th
319. splay the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again 296 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Note The number of branch instructions that can be acquired by a trace and the trace display differ depending on the product For the specification of each product refer to the online help 5 14 3 Clearing the Trace Information When Clear is selected from the popup menu the trace buffer that stores the trace information becomes empty If several Trace windows are open all Trace windows will be cleared as they all access the same buffer 5 14 4 Saving the Trace Information in a File Select Save from the popup menu to open the Save As file dialog box which allows the user to save the information displayed in the Trace window as a text file A range can be specified based on the PTR number This file can only be saved it cannot be reloaded into the Trace window 5 14 5 Viewing the Source Window The Source window corresponding to the selected trace record can be displayed in the following two ways e Select a trace record and choose View Source from the popup menu e Double click a trace record The Source or Disassembly window opens and the selected line is marked with a cursor 5 14 6 Trimming the Source Choose Trim Source from the popup menu to remove the white space from the left side of the source When the white space is removed a check mark is s
320. ssion t p Me a Esia SessionH8 E10T SYSTE lm agats Ennn TTO nO test Find in Files Figure 4 33 Selecting the Session File 228 2tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual In the list box that is circled in figure 4 33 select the session file name including the character string that has been set in the Target name text box in figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 dialog box The setting for using the emulator has been registered in this session file After the session file name is selected the emulator will automatically be connected For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debug Sessions 229 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 6 Reconnecting the Emulator When the emulator is disconnected use the following way for reconnection Select Build gt Debug gt Connect or click the Connect toolbar button The emulator is connected Note The emulator must be selected in the Target drop down list box of the Debug Settings dialog box that is opened by selecting Debug settings from the Options menu see 4 3 1 Setting at Emulator Activation 4 7 Ending the Emulator When using the toolchain the emulator can be exited by using the following two methods e Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated e Exiting the HEW 1 Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated Select Disconnect f
321. sters in the Register window Click the Go button Note The items that can be set in this page differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help 338 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Ox000010b6 Ox000010c4 Ox000010d2 O0x000010e0 Ox000010f 0 0x00001100 0x00001110 0x00001120 0x00001130 0x00001140 0x00001150 0x00001160 O0x00001170 Ox0000117a Ox00001182 The program runs and then stops at the condition specified under Break Condition 1 p_sam gt sort la p_sam gt change a p_sam gt s0 al0 p_sam gt s aL1 p_sam gt s al p_sam gt s3 a3 p_sam gt sd al4 p_sam gt sb aL5 p_sam gt s6 aL6 p_sam gt s al 7 p_sam gt s8 aL8 p_sam gt s9 aL9 delete p_sam void abort void Figure 6 36 Source Window at Execution Stop Break Condition 1 7tENESAS 339 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Status window displays the following contents H8 xxxx ELOT SYSTEM HS xxxx Ready Cause of last break Break condition 1 Run time count oo000h000min000s210ms Emulation mode Normal Endian Big ai gt Platform Figure 6 37 Displayed Contents of the Status Window Break Condition 1 Note The items that can be set in this window differ depending on the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help 340 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop U
322. style of the project generation wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog and are initially hidden in the system components part of the tools administration tree To export one of the custom project generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog The execution environments of the custom project generators are packaged on the execution file that can be installed When this file is executed on the target user s machine the custom project generator is installed 100 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the Toolbar The High performance Embedded Workshop provides 2 standard toolbars as detailed in chapter 1 Overview In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars via the Customize dialog figure 6 1 Customize ME ditor Debug iV Search Templates hoolber rene Figure 6 1 Customize Dialog Toolbars Tab gt To create a new toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Click the New button The dialog shown in figure 6 2 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar name field 4 Click OK to create the new toolbar New Toolbar MyT oolbal Figure 6 2 New Toolbar Dialog 101 RENESAS High performa
323. tem menu options and toolbar buttons list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 3 will be displayed This figure shows a dialog when Add File s has been selected for example 3 Commands are added via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information 4 Close the Define Command for lt command gt dialog by clicking OK 5 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 121 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Define Commands for Add File s Modit BEMGyE May EGG TT Figure 8 3 Modify System Menu Option Example 122 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 1 2 User menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar gt To create a new version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field 4 Commands are added to the menu option via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands late
324. tered In the first example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder and then select the required placeholder from the pop up menu to the right of the edit field File c project myproject ouput fle7 cut gt Figure D 1 Placeholder Pop up Menu In the second example select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the drop down list box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder If you select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field 351 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Relative to Configuration directory x Sub Directory Figure D 2 Placeholder Drop down List and Sub Directory Field In the third example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder select the required placeholder from the drop down list box and then click the Insert button Placeholder Configuration directory z Insert Figure D 3 Placeholder Drop down List In the fourth example type the placeholder into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by and followed by i e This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR FILEDIR 352 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual D 3 Available Plac
325. the editor window To remove a bookmark select the line to remove a bookmark and click this button the mark in the blank on the left side of the editor window will disappear For further information on bookmarks refer to the Bookmarks section later in this chapter 65 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons Oy Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter ay Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters amp Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the current search string 2 Find Previous Finds the previous occurrence of the current search string 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons mm Toggle Bookmarks Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line m al Next Bookmark Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line ma Previous Bookmark Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line oe Clear All Bookmarks Clears all bookmarks in the current file 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons ail Define Template Specify template text for subsequent ins
326. the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself Figure 4 8 illustrates two examples The first i shows the effect of pressing return when the auto indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the line int z 20 is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second example ii shows the effect of i of the previous line Now when the line int z 20 is typed it is automatically aligned i e automatically indented pressing return when auto indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 Int y 2 int z 20 void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 Int y ud int z 20 i Auto Indentation Disabled ii Auto Indentation Enabled Figure 4 8 Effect of Auto Indentation gt To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable auto indentation check box accordingly 3 Click OK for the setting of the auto indentation check box to take effect 77 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 9 Splitting a Window The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to split a text window into
327. the current configuration s directory Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 355 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 356 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix E I O File Format HEW formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space E 1 File Format Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations o
328. the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without changing the setting Set Batch File Batch File Play a gt Browse Cancel Figure 5 9 Set Batch File Dialog Box 5 3 3 Executing a Command File Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the popup menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution Choose Stop from the popup menu to stop command execution The Stop menu item becomes valid during command execution 242 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 5 Specifying a Log File Choose Set Log File from the popup menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File Figure 5 10 Open Log File Dialog Box Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar If you select the name of a previous log file the system will ask whether you wish to append to or overwrite the existing file 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging Choose Logging from
329. the popup menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 5 3 7 Entering a Full Path to the File It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command Line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To solve this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the popup menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 243 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 8 Pasting a Placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the popup menu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line 5 4 Looking at Registers If you are debugging at assembly language level then you will find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general purpose registers You can do this by using the Register window 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window
330. the product For the settings for each product refer to the online help This page sets the address bus data bus and read write cycle conditions The Address group box sets address bus conditions Option Description Don t care check box Does not set address conditions Address radio button Sets the use of the normal address bus as break conditions Only program fetched address after Sets a break after prefetched address execution as break radio button conditions Address edit box Sets the address bus value with a number or a symbol Mask edit box Sets a value to be masked when User mask is selected For masked bits the break condition is satisfied for any values The contents of an option that can be will change depending on the radio button selected Option Description Address radio button All options can be set Only program fetched address after The Address option can be set radio button The Data group box sets the data bus conditions Option Description Don t care check box No data conditions are set Value edit box Sets the data bus with a number Low byte radio button Sets data access size as the lower 8 bit access High byte radio button Sets data access size as the upper 8 bit access Word radio button Sets data access size as the word access 294 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Read Write group box sets the
331. the template is inserted Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With Time TIME Current time Date as DMY DATE_DMY Current date in dd mm yy form Date as MDY DATE_MDY Current date in mm dd yy form Date as YMD DATE_YMD Current date in yy mm dd form Date as Text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form Line LINE First line number of template insertion User USER Current windows user File FULLFILE Name of the file Filename FILE Name and full path of the file Project Name PROJNAME Current project name Workspace Name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Cursor position A Insertion cursor Positions the cursor in this position after template has been inserted 7 Enter the character to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation 82 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual User Input When defining a template it is possible to define a user input field Using the following placeholder specifies this USERINPUT lt n gt l lt some text gt The n is a number which identifies the user input identifier These placeholders can be added manually but the user input button on the define templates dialog adds these placeholders in an automated manner When the te
332. the workspace 1 Select the unloaded project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Load Project option 3 This will also set the project that was just loaded as the current project gt To unload a project in the workspace 1 Select the active project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Unload Project option 33 RENESAS 2 10 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Inserting a Project into a Workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into a workspace To insert a new project into a workspace 1 2 3 4 Note Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed figure 2 23 Set the New Project option Click OK The Insert New Project dialog will be invoked Enter the name of the new workspace into the Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character As you enter the project name the HEW will add a subdirectory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired Click the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively
333. tion combo box NMI signal group box User interface clock combo box Breakcondition mode group box Flash memory synchronization combo box 232 Displays the MCU name Selects the emulation mode at user program execution Select Normal to perform normal emulation Select No break to disable PC breakpoint or break condition settings during emulation Sets the step interrupt option Disable interrupts during single step execution Disables interrupts during step execution Enable interrupts during single step execution Enables interrupts during step execution Sets the use of the NMI signal When used as a forced break in the emulator select Emulator In this case the NMI signal cannot be used The contents of the NMI vector address are rewritten by the emulator program When used in the user program select User In this case the forced break cannot be used Before user program execution set the breakpoints or break conditions for the exception processing and generate exceptions to halt the program Displays the transfer clock of the user interface Sets the address break release function When the address break function is not used in the user program select Emulator In this case the hardware break and step functions can be used The contents of the vector address are rewritten by the emulator program to satisfy the break conditions When the address break is used in the user program select Us
334. tion on double click Cancel Figure 13 6 C Configure view dialog The following items are available on the configure view dialog e Group by access This option groups the display of public protected and private member variables and functions together in the navigation view e Jump to definition on double click By default this option is checked If this option is switched off then a dialog is displayed which asks you where you wish to jump You rather than HEW resolve the ambiguity This dialog is shown in figure 13 6 158 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Select Query Location x Select the query to jump to Go to Declaration animal h line 12 Go to Definition animal h line 12 Figure 13 7 C Configure view dialog Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection To view the Base or derived classes 1 Select the class that interests you in the navigation view 2 Right click and view the pop up menu 3 To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu item To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu item 4 Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format 5 Click OK to close this dialog once you have the information you require 13 2 C Function and d
335. to configure an another tool for the open file operation See To associate an application with a file group for more details If the Windows default option is selected then the open file function in the workspace window passes the open file to the Windows operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list 20 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Absolute file Windows default Figure 2 9 Add File Extension Dialog New Group If you want to create a new extension because your project uses a different extension from those accepted by the HEW For example a phase might by default use the extension asm but the HEW only recognizes src Then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below 2 To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 10 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current pr
336. ton To abort the uninstall click the No or Cancel buttons Confirmation C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 h8_5020 hrf C HewTools Hitachi H845_0_2 h8_5020 hut C HewT ools Hitachi H845_0_2 HEW C HewsT ools HitachiSH845_0_2 include C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600a_00 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H84 5_0_2 bin 2600a_01 pak C HewTools Hitachi SH8 5_0_2 bin 2600a_10 pak C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600a_11 pak C HewsT ools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_00 pak C HewsT ools HitachitH845_0_2 bin 2600n_01 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_10 pak C Hew T ools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_11 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 300_000 pak C HewT ools HitachitH845_0_2 bin 300_001 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 300_010 pak Figure 5 10 Confirmation Dialog 96 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 7 Technical Support Issues The Tools Administration dialog is also capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the HEW itself that cannot be unregistered registered manually If you check the Show all components check box on the tools administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see figure 5 11 5 x Tools Administration Registered components w PELL Component i Sl System Tools Utility Phases Deb
337. tructure of the version control sub menu Options ntrol Select Configure ity Add File s ies Remove File s System Get File s Defined amp Check Out File s Option B Check In File s Status of File s j 3 User History of File s Defined Undo Check out of File s Option Figure 8 2 Version Control Sub Menu 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed in table 8 1 Table 8 1 System Menu Option Option Description Add File s Add selected file s to version control system Remove File s Remove selected file s from version control system Get File s Get a read only local copy of the selected file s from version control system Check In File s Put back i e update the selected file s in version control system with the local copy Check Out File s Get a writable local copy of the selected file s from version control system Status of File s View the status of the selected file s gt To modify a system menu toolbar option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the option to be modified from the Sys
338. tting Resis ters e nenni a ines Sie ee eee A E S 317 6 9 Execu ting the Propane serepin i aieia e E E EIERE E A 318 6 10 Reviewing Breakpoints ce eee eeceeeceseceeceseesecesecssecaecasecaeesaecaecaeecaeeeaesenesenetaeeeaeeees 320 6 11 Viewing Memory eeir a E a ER ae 321 xi High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 12 Watching Variables ee eee eecesecesecssecssecsaecaeecseeeeeseneseeeseeseeseeeeeeeeaeesseseseesaeenaeeeaes 323 6 13 Stepping Through a Program 00 cc eeceeseesecssecssecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeceaeceaecaecsuesaeeeaeteaes 326 6 13 1 Executing Step In Command cece cecesecesecssecsseeseceaecsaeseeceeeaeeeneeees 326 6 13 2 Executing Step Out Command 00 eee ee cescesecsseceeceaecnaecaeceecaeeeaeseeeteneeaes 328 6 13 3 Executing Step Over Command 0000 eee ee ceeecesecsecsseesecesecaeseeecseeeseeeneeees 329 6 14 Forced Breaking of Program Executions 0 cece ceeeeseeseeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseensecsaecnaessaeeaees 330 6 15 Displaying Local Variables scccsicsczssssisscassesscesyoteaneessisnessistdnaversasndsssedinavoassenssainasnsseeaeesaees 331 616 Break FUNGUO Deenen ei een aiee nies Ee ER EE AE E S ESSE EE EER Rais 332 6 16 1 PC Break Funct nies ses scisseecscisscessciscivesceueeesceuseesncetsenvecetsensesentesus Eroan rE 332 6 17 Hardware Break Function cee eecesecesecsecssecseeeseeeneeeseeeeeeecesecssecesesesensecesessaeesaeeaaes 337 6 18 WraCe F NGUONS siirre or Eee
339. ugger Components Register Cancel E 4 Extension Components Communication Tools Urreaister H E System Extension Components z H E Project Generators Properties E Hitachi H85 H8 300 Project Generator Eee SH Project Generator 21 E Project Generators Custom Sane E Version Control System E Toolchain Support Tool information LI Definition Parser H A Uninstaller T mial IV Show all components Current HEW tools database location C Hew Modify paoe OOOO Figure 5 11 All Components Shown When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The properties dialog that will be invoked behaves in the same way as discussed previously in this chapter with the exception that there is no Environment tab The HEW also has a feature which outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information on the entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW gt To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A standard windows file save dialog is displayed 3 Choose the file location and click OK 4 A file is create
340. umn States dialog is displayed The Check status shows whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked it is enabled if the check box is gray this means that in some files the column is enabled and in other files it is not BnD 5 Click OK for the new column settings to take effect To switch off a column in one source files 1 Right click on the editor window which you wish to remove a column from and the editor pop up is displayed 2 Click the Columns menu item and a cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it has a tick next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 86 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Global Editor Column States v Coverage ME ditor MSource Address Figure 4 17 Global column state Dialog RENESAS 87 88 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 Tools Administration You control the components which can be used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 which is invoked via Tools gt Administration Modification of the Tools Administration dialog box is only possible when no workspace is open while only reference is possible when a workspace is open Tools Administrati
341. ur application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built figure 2 2 Add Project Files gt Remove Project Files Debug ON Optimize OFF Set Compiler Options List File YES Source Fi Debug OFF k s Optimize OFF Set Assembler Options List File YES Assembl Source Fi Debug ON Silent YES Set Linker options Map File YES Library Files Figure 2 2 Editing a Project 14 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 1 Adding Files to a Project Before you can build your application you must first inform the High performance Embedded Workshop which files it is composed of gt To add a files to a project 1 Select Project gt Add Files select Add Files from the Workspace window s pop up menu see figure 2 3 or press INS when the Workspace window is selected Open dbsct c Build dbsct c Build Options d Add Files INS Remove Files Exclude Build dbsct c Version Control L Configure View iv Allow Docking Hide Properties Show Differences Figure 2 3 Project Pop up Menu 2 The Add dialog will be displayed 3 Select the file s that you want to add and then click Add There are a number of other ways to add new files to the proje
342. urce file C header file C list file C source file D Comments D Control D Declaration D Operator D PreProcessor C header file C list file C source file 5 Expanded assembly E Hex file HEY Sample Text i 6z Add Modify Remove OK Cancel Fa D H 0 Figure 4 12 Format Views Dialog Keywords Tab 4 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog figure 4 13 will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click OK to close the dialog To remove a keyword select the keyword and click the Remove button Add Keyword BE rome Figure 4 13 Add Keyword Dialog When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name which has one of the above extensions To disable enable syntax coloring 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable syntax coloring check box as necessary and then click OK 81 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to ente
343. urce file which contains the column you want to remove and click the Edit menu 2 Click the Columns menu item to display a cascaded menu item The columns are displayed in this popup menu If a column is enabled it has a tick mark next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 237 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code If there is an address at the cursor position in the Source window selecting Go to Disassembly in the pop up menu opens the Disassembly window The first address displayed in the Disassembly window is the address where the cursor is placed in the Source window If you do not have a source file but wish to view code in the assembly language level either choose View gt Disassembly or click on the Disassembly window s toolbar button amp The Disassembly window opens at the current PC location Selecting Mixed display from the popup menu of the Disassembly window displays both the source and the code The following shows an example in this case 22 void main void 23 24 while 1 00001028 40FC 26 oes 4 28 29 void tutorial void tutorial 5E0010F4 sp_regsv 3 24 nd 79370028 H 0028 R 30 00001032 0D74 R R4 lt i long aL10J 32 long i 33 Gage 34 class Sample p_sam 35 36 p_sam new Sample 00001034 1900 SUB W RO RO 00001036 5E002000 JSR Samp
344. ution of the phase if any of the input files don t exist 5 Select Read Output On Fly checkbox to display build output as it happens rather than showing the output at the end of each phase execution Modify MyPhase 24 x Command Environment Command excluding parameters C tools mytool exe gt Browse Initial directory S CONFIGOIR gt Browse I Don t check for input file s existence before executing I Bead Output On Fly Figure 3 7 Modify Phase Dialog Command Tab 6 Select the Environment tab figure 3 8 to edit the environment settings for the phase 7 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables The operation is the same as discussed in the previous section 8 Click OK when all modifications have been made Modify MyPhase 2 x Command Environment l Environment settings PATH c dos c tools SHOWALL FALSE ENV 1024 Figure 3 8 Modify Phase Dialog Environment Tab 48 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or press amp you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the fi
345. vsetessevseresseves donvoenssens 95 Technical Support Isstiess sci cssssccii nasa iees sania lines vie haa eee 97 On Demand components rsisi e nE ene EER E EEA EEE T E EE Eri 99 Custom Project Ty pes xc sccsess ce sccedsheckesocesecevesverdeossdlesesbegicduseeiiecvoestensssesdbessndensodsseuieersee 100 Customizing the Be my ie ONC 1 sai assess cantivat ccacnaynseastausecnanncseananidcarcstantoetinds 101 Customizing the TOO bar xis scecseieiesetbens essed obsteacvuesessasstegietaanescavenssendeesicestesinns EERE ip 101 Customizing the Tools Menu eee eesceeeeeeeeeeceeecesecesecesecaecaeeaecsaecaesaeesaeeeaeeeneeegs 104 Configuring the Help System 0 cee eceeseeesceeeeeeceeeceseceseceaecaecsaecaeecaeesaesaaesaeesaeeeaeeags 106 Specifying Workspace Options cc eecesceseceecseeceecseeeseeeeeeeseeseeesecsecaecsaeesaecsaesaaeenes 107 6 4 1 Open last workspace at Start Up ee eceecceesceeeceseceseceaecseecaeecaeeeaeseneseeeeeeeeerenes 107 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening Workspace eseecesecsseesseceeecneeeaesseetaeetaeeeeeeees 107 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace e eee 108 v 7 ENESAS 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 9 1 9 2 vi High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools seesssessseeesssrrerssrrresrrsrreresreereeen 108 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace ss essseessereerssr
346. w Project Files 220 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual j The dialog box for sum checking is displayed and programming is completed a Flash memory writing OK Sum data H 00db9448 Figure 4 26 Message for Completion of Flash Memory Writing k When the following dialog box is displayed close and restart or exit the workspace To write the same data to the MCU continuously select Debug gt Initialize and go back to step c displaying Select Emulator mode To exit close the workspace AN Please Restart or Exit Figure 4 27 Message for Restarting or Exiting Writing Flash Memory Mode 221 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 Debug Sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a similar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each debugging platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary program rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project Debug sessions are described in detail below 4 4 1 Selecting a Session The current session can be selected in the following two ways e From the toolbar Select a session from the drop down list box figure 4 28 in t
347. w Help D cb a Gt __ Baid phases maaus 2iolae ial Awe a a a amp IE Build Configurations Sve Bessiont8nox E107 _svs x 2t 3 T Pl IE Gegi Ble amp A ess Debug Settings Radix Emulator Write_only Find in Files A Version Control Figure 4 22 HEW Window 218 2eENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual g Select the target MCU and then the download module with the Add button Debug Settings SessionH8_xxxx_F1 OT_SYSTEN Target Options E Write_only Target 10T SYSTEM Default Debug Format S Record Download Modules FileName Offset Address C Hew3 Tools H OOO00000 move Modify Figure 4 23 Debug Setting Dialog Box Target Page 219 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual h The download file is displayed on Project Files E E Wr ite_only E Write_only a Download modules PE Write_only mot J Dependencies E Projects Templates Navigation Figure 4 24 Workspace Window Project Files i Select and download the file with the right hand mouse button El E Write_only es Write_only Download modules E Deper Download module Download module debug data only Unload module Configure View F E Projects E T Allow Docking Hide Figure 4 25 Download Menu of the Workspace Windo
348. wer type microcomputers e Click the OK button to set a configuration 311 7tENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 5 Checking the Operation of RAM Check that RAM is operating correctly Display and edit the contents of the memory in the Memory window to check that the memory is operating correctly Note The memory can be installed on the board in some microcomputers In this case however the above way of checking the operation of memory may be inadequate It is recommended that a program for checking the memory be created e Select Memory from the CPU submenu of the View menu and enter the RAM address Here enter H FE80 and H FEFF in the Begin and End edit boxes respectively and set the size in the Format combo box to Byte HFEFF Format Byte amp 1 x Display Value As ANSI character v Bytes Gount For One Line fi Byte 7 Figure 6 2 Format Dialog Box Note The settings of the RAM area differ depending on the product For details refer to the hardware manual e Click the OK button The Memory window is displayed and shows the specified memory area 312 7 ENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Address O0x0000FE80 Ox0000FE90 Ox000QOFEAO0 Ox0000OFEBO Ox0000FECO Ox000O0FEDO Ox000O0FEEQ Ox0000FEF0 Figure 6 3 Memory Window e Placing the mouse cursor on a point in the display of data in the Memory wi
349. with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select multiple configurations then a dialog is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 3 4 1 Options Tab The Options tab figure 3 11 allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command which was entered when you defined the phase figure 3 3d Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list box and then click the Insert button For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders 50 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual sub CONFIGDIR buildlib sub Configuration directory He pliers LK cancel Figure 3 11 Custom Options Options Tab 3 4 2 Output Files Tab The Output Files tab figure 3 12 is where you can specify the output file or files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produce
350. ws the structure of the database specified in step 6 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in the Project name field 9 Click ORK 10 HEW will require you to repeat steps 7 9 for as many projects as are present in the current workspace SourceSafe Login 21x Username Password Cancel Database path l Browse Figure 9 1 SourceSafe Login Dialog 137 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Create SourceSafe Project 21x Project name proiect Cancel project El agip ariel bp E commit E def xl Figure 9 2 Create SourceSafe Project The HEW has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and sets up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access However although the Visual SourceSafe projects themselves have been created no files have been added to them 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe The previous section has only established the mappings between the project directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe i e the controlled directory Although the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directly its mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty Firstly you must select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To add a
351. xffde lone l10 HOO000f6 Oxff4a lone H000a Oxff48 tint Oxfbd8 Oxff46 class Sample Figure 5 46 Locals Window If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value of the local variable will be incorrect until another value is assigned to the local variable The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window 285 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 13 Using the Event Points The emulator has the event point function that performs breaking tracing and execution time measurement by specifying higher level conditions along with the PC breakpoints standard for the HEW 5 13 1 PC Breakpoints When the instruction of the specified address is fetched the user program is stopped Up to 255 points can be set 5 13 2 Break Conditions Break conditions can be used for higher level conditions such as the data condition as well as specification of the single address 5 13 3 Opening the Event Window Select View gt Code gt Eventpoints or click the Eventpoints toolbar button d to open the Event window The Event window has the following two sheets Breakpoint sheet Displays the settings made for PC breakpoints It is also possible to set modify and cancel PC breakpoints Breakcondition sheet Displays or sets the settings made for break condition channels
352. y in a certain area of the HEW system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support 89 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 1 Tool Locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location this is referred to as registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself The remainder of this chapter discusses registration and how it affects you 5 2 HEW Registration Files HRF When a HEW compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF figure 5 2 1 This file named a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the tools administration dialog figure 5 2 ii i INSTALL ii REGISTER m CA C MyTool a MyTool Le MYTOOL HRF MYTOOL HRF l S H fe i mf etc mf etc _ a help _ a help Figure 5 2 HRF File Location and Registration In order to use a
353. zed Configuration Configuration Configuration Debug ON Debug ON Debug OFF optimize OFF 7 Foptimize OFF t optimize ON c List File YES H List File NO H List File NO H Source Files Debug OFF Debug ON Debug OFF Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON H List File YES jH List File NO f List File NO H Assembler Source Files C MyProject Default C MyProject MyDebug C MyProject MyOptimized Figure 2 14 Configurations and File Options 25 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration The current configuration can be set in two ways Either 1 Select it from the drop down list box figure 2 15 in the toolbar Release Release Figure 2 15 Toolbar Selection or 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations This will invoke the Build Configurations Dialog figure 2 16 Build Configurations 2f xi Build configurations Remove nm Current configuration Debug 7 Figure 2 16 Build Configurations Dialog 2 Select the configuration that you want to use from the Current configuration drop down list 3 Click OK to set the configuration 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations You can add a new configuration by copying settings from anothe

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

HD Radio™ receiver with iPod Dock and Dual  Istruzioni per l`uso GMM 70  Télécharger  A3ビジネスカラーLED複合機  Gigaset S450 SIM - Migros    Anna_1796_K1:6761 Rollon_663x_0305  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file